cr<r 
 -<3r • 
 ■■ cr<c 
 
 ::.' cxcb: 
 
 
 d <5 
 
 5P <5jc 
 
 I<2XJg 
 
 
 
 tccc^ 
 "<rcr<c?c 
 
 tCC'C 
 
 Library of congress. 51 
 
 <: 
 
 d c c 
 id. cc 
 
 ~£%^ ,1.1/ | 
 
 4 
 
 UNITED STATES OP AMERICA, f 
 
 r: <cM 
 
 €iC£C 
 
 cere 
 
 <xs:<C,.. <CL 
 
 : <sr<c S 
 

 cccc: 
 
 <3i.C 
 
 Clccc^ 
 
 KS2I" <T cV: <x .<: 
 
 
 ■"II <d 
 
 clc: 
 
 <€C 
 
 <^lc: 
 
 «C 
 
 CCT 
 
 
 <:<c 
 
 
 ec; 
 
 
 CjC 
 
 <$$S3C 
 
 <r<c 
 
 ^ST^ 
 
 <rc 
 
 
 <rc 
 
 W£8M< 
 
 C^ 
 
 CTC* 
 
 c&c 
 
 CSC 
 
 esc: 
 
 <2cc: 
 ctcct 
 
 cc 
 
 ccc: 
 
 <ccci<P 
 
 <eScc^ 
 
 «3& 
 
 <CX 
 
 
 ost'ec 
 
 c < 
 
ABSTRACT 
 
 ELOCUTION AND MUSIC, 
 
 IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE 
 
 PRINCIPLES OF PHYSIOLOGY AND THE LAWS OF LIFE, 
 
 FOR THE 
 
 DEVELOPEMENT OF BODY AND MIND. 
 BY PROFESSOR BRONSON. 
 
 [COPY RIGHT SECURED ACCORDING TO LAW.] 
 
 The Venous System. 
 
 The Arterial System* 
 
 A U B U E N : 
 Henry Oliphnnt, Book and Job Printer, 
 
 Journal Oihce, Exehauge Buiklmgsu 
 

 Human Skeleton— (Front View.) 
 a b 
 
 Side View of Brains, Spine, &e 
 
 
 KaptfRENcss.— For explanation of these two Engravings, see opposite page. 
 
in 
 
 Thk Venous System.— The blood 
 flows constantly through the veins on 
 its way to the heart, which propels it to 
 the lungs to be purified by the air which 
 we inhale: this system is represented 
 by the first engraving : here are the 
 principal veins of the body; the large 
 one in the centre, is the vena cava, into 
 which all the minor veins empty them- 
 selves. It should be observed that the 
 veins are more on the external surface 
 than the arteries ; seen in the skeleton 
 of the manikin. 
 
 The Arterial System. — When the 
 blood has been purified, as above men- 
 tioned, it is returned to the heart, which 
 sends it throughout the Arterial System, 
 represented by the second engraving: 
 the main artery in the centre, is the 
 aorta, which communicates with the 
 heart, where it appears cut off. As a 
 small proportion of the blood is appro- 
 priated, on its circulation through the 
 body, a connexion of the arteries and 
 veins is, seen to be necessary; which 
 is effected by what are called the capil- 
 my vessels; i. e. very minuie branches 
 of the arterial system into similar ones 
 of the venous system, through which 
 the globules of blood pass, as it were, 
 Indifia file. 
 
 References-:o the front view of the 
 skeleton on the opposite page. A, 
 Frontal Bone : B, Parietal bone ; C, or- 
 bit : D, Temporal bone : E, Lower jaw: 
 
 F, Cervical vertebra, bones of the neck: 
 
 G, Clavicle or cellar bone: H, Humerus, 
 or fore arm : I, Ribs : J, Dorsal verte- 
 brae : K, Lumbar vertebra? ; L M, Iliac 
 bones ; N, Ulna or elbow bone : 0, Ra- 
 dius, or spoke bone : P, bones of the car- 
 pus or wrist : Q, bones of the Metacar- 
 pus or fore wrist : R, Phalanges or joints 
 of the fingers : S, Femur or thigh bone : 
 T, Patella or knee pan: U, Tibia or 
 Shin bone : V, Fibula, or brace bone : 
 W, Tarsis or ankle : X, Metatarsus or 
 fore ankle : Y, Phalanges or joints of 
 the toes. 
 
 Rbfekf.nces. to the 2d engraving on 
 the opposite page. Half of the Head ; 
 &p;nal column, Ace. Cerebrum, (a^ ; Cer- 
 ebellum, (b) ; medulla oblongata, (g); 
 epiiutl marrow, (c d) ; and the nerves ^f 
 organic life in the centre at the left. 
 
 The Skeleton outline of a part of the 
 Man.kin, on the fourth ['age, aliow* the 
 
 front part of the Cerebellum, (C) or Tin- 
 tie brain ; which is the region of feeling 
 and thence manifested throughout tiver 
 whole body through the nervous system : 
 the ribs are distinctly seen with their 
 cut ends; the heart and lungs, (called 
 lights in animals.) are taken out, to 
 that the upper and front parts of the 
 Diaphragm, (called midriff in brutes,) 
 are clearly seen ; the Thoracic Duct run- 
 ning up the Back Bone from the Dia- 
 phragm ; the Liver, (L) under this mus- 
 cle, lying principally on the right side ; 
 the Gall Bladder, (G) ; the Kidneys, 
 (k kj; large Vems and Arteries below, 
 the intestines being taken away - ? the 
 Bladder, (b) and the urethras conduct- 
 ing to it, and the Alirt, just without the 
 leh kidney. The lines running over 
 the surface of the arms and lower tx-= 
 tremitie** represent the Yeins. Studjr 
 the whole very thoroughly. 
 
 In the outlines of the more import- 
 ant parts of the Manikin, on the fourth 
 page, may be seen on the top, the cere- 
 brum (C.) or large brain, (which is the 
 region of thought,) the top of the skull 
 being removed j the muscles (M.)abou* 
 the mouth, nose, &«Rhe large arteries 
 and veins running up and down the 
 neck ; the lungs ; right lobe (R. L.)and 
 left lobe (L. L.) and the heart Vetween 
 them ; the diaphragm (D.) and the liver 
 (L.) under it ; the gall (G.) the stomach 
 (S.) left open, and the other digestive 
 organs (I.) the milt (M.) on the right of 
 reader. The cerebrum is divided into 
 two hemispheres, at the black line in the 
 centre ; the veins and arteries are seen 
 on the right part of it, the veins on the 
 skull below where the brain is seen ; 
 the large arteries and veins running to 
 each arm ; the ends of the ribs on the 
 right and left : the left lobe of the lungs 
 is exposed so as to show the internal 
 structure ; to wit, the branches of the 
 bronchial tubes, the continuation of 
 the veins and arteries : let the engra- 
 vings be examined minutely and ofteu, 
 till a perfect picture of them is formed 
 in the mind. 
 
 Note. Some idea of the great r 1- 
 pense of getting up this little book, maj 
 be conceived from the fact, that the t x- 
 pense for the two engravings from the 
 Manikin on the fourth page, osi fif- 
 teen dollars. 
 
IT 
 Two Front Views of the Manikin.— By Dr. Auzoux, of Paris, France 
 
 References.— Cerebrum, (C); Muscles of 
 
 the face, (M) ; the right lobe of the Lungs, 
 
 (R.L4; left lobe of the Lunss, (L. L.) ; 
 
 KaFERENCEs.—Cerebellura, (C) ; Liv- Heart between the lobes ; the Diaphragm, 
 
 «jr, (L) ; Kidneys, (E. K.) : Bladder, (I)) . Lirer, (L) ; Gall, (G) j Stomach, (S), 
 
 *B.) ; Milt, (M 3 ) ; lines, the Veins. Milt, (M) ; Intestines, (I.) 
 
ABSTRACT 
 
 ELOCUTION AND MUSIC, 
 
 IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE 
 
 PRINCIPLES OF PHYSIOLOGY AND THE LAWS OF LIFE 
 
 FOR THE 
 
 DEVELOPEMENT OF BODY AND MIND. 
 
 BY PlfOFESSOR BRONSON. 
 
 [COPY RIGHT SECURED ACCORDING TO LAW.] 
 
 lr This Abstract is designed express- 
 ly for his Pupils, until the larger work 
 shall be published; which will be in a 
 few months : it is a mere skeleton, into 
 which practice must breathe the breath 
 
 of LIFE. 
 
 2. The lungs should be comparatively 
 quiescent in breathing and speaking; 
 and the dorsal and abdominal muscles 
 used for both purposes. All children are 
 naturally right in this particular, cut be- 
 come perverted during their primary ed- 
 ucation ; hence, the author introduces an 
 entirely new mode of learning the let- 
 ters, of spelling, and teaching reading 
 without a book, and then with a bock ; 
 the same as we learn to talk. The ef- 
 fort to produce sounds, and to breathe, 
 must be made from the lower muscles 
 above alluded to • thus, by the practice 
 of expelling, (not exploding) the vowel- 
 sounds, w 7 e return to truth and nature. 
 
 3. The following engraving of the tho- 
 rax, &c. will assist the learner in under- 
 standing this part of thesubject : observe 
 the windpipe is analagous to the nose of 
 the bellows, the lungs to the sides, and 
 the abdominal and dorsal muscles to the 
 handles : 
 
 Larynx. 
 
 Windpipe. 
 
 Collarbone 
 Bronchia. 
 Heart and 
 Lungs. 
 Diaphragm 
 
 Short Ribs. 
 
 Dorsal and 
 
 Abdominal 
 
 jVIuscles. 
 
 j 4. Here is a view of a well developed 
 I and naturally proportioned chest ; with 
 ! breadth and space for the lungs, the short 
 | ribs thrown outwardly, affording ample 
 j room, for the free action of all the organs 
 necessary to sustain life ; it is the true 
 ! model of the form of one w r ho would live 
 to a good old age. 
 
 5. No one can enjoy good health when 
 the thorax is habitually compressed- 
 which diminishes the capacity of I he 
 lungs for receiving the necessary air to 
 arterialize or purify the blood, and pre- 
 vents the prcper action of the diaphragm . 
 The following engraving shows the 
 alarming condition of the thorax when 
 compressed by tight lacing ; a. practice 
 that has hurried, and is now hurrying, 
 hundreds of thousands to a premature 
 grave, besides entailing upon the off- 
 spring an accumulation of evils too awful 
 to contemplate. What is the dinerence 
 between killing one's self in five min- 
 utes with a razor, and doing it in five 
 years by tight lacing, or intemperance i 
 As the skin is the safety valve of the 
 system, our clothing should never be s< 
 tight as to prevent the air coming be- 
 tween it and_the body. 
 
 6. Here 
 outline of the 
 ■chest or thor- 
 ax of a female, 
 showing the 
 i condition of 
 ithe bones of 
 the body, as 
 they appea r 
 after death, m 
 every one who has habitually worn stays 
 and corsets, enforced by tight lacing. 
 'But,' says one. '/do not lace too tight.' 
 If you Lace at alLyon most certainly dy, 
 and will sooner or 'later experience the 
 dreadful consequences. Observe,— all 
 
the false or short ribs, from the lower 
 end of the breast bone, are unnaturally 
 cramped inwardly toward the spine, so 
 that the liver, stomach, and other diges- 
 tive organs in that vicinity, are pressed 
 into such a small compass, that their 
 functions are greatly interrupted, and all 
 the vessels, bones and viscera are more 
 or less distorted and enfeebled - 
 
 7. Every time the heart beats there 
 is a certain quantity of blood thrown 
 from it into the lungs for the purpose of 
 being arterialized, or revivified by the 
 oxygen of the atmospheric air which we 
 inhale. That is, when the blood is first 
 thrown from the heart into the lungs, it 
 is mixed with what is called carbon, and 
 which would produce death if not sepa- 
 rated from the blood ; and a certain part 
 of the atmosphere which we breathe is 
 called oxygen, which is the vital part of 
 air: now when this oxygen and that 
 carbon come together in. the air cells of 
 th ; lungs, they unite and form what is 
 called carbonic acid gas. and in this state 
 is exhaled. Every one is so constructed 
 as to require a certain amount of air to 
 sustain the life and promote the health of 
 the body ; consequently, if by compres- 
 sion or sitting, &c. in a bent position, the 
 capacity of the lungs be diminished, in 
 that proportion will the health be im- 
 paired, and life shortened. 
 
 Directions. — Let the position be 
 erect, and the body balanced on the heel 
 of the foot upon which you stand ; then 
 banish all care and anxiety from the 
 mind ; let the forehead be perfectly 
 smooth ; the lungs entirely quiescent, 
 and make every effort from the abdom- 
 inal region. To expand the thorax, 
 strike the palms of the hands together 
 before, and the backs of them behind, 
 turning the thumbs outward : do all 
 with a united action of the whole body 
 and mind ; the center of exertion being 
 in the small of the back ; be in earnest, 
 but husband your breath and strength, 
 breathe often, and be perfectly free, easy, 
 independent, and natural. 
 
 ELEMENTS OF LANGUAGE. 
 
 We have sixteen Vowel sounds, and 
 twenty eight Consonant sounds. 
 
 8. Vowels. — A — has four Regular 
 Sound*. 1st, Name sound, or long — 
 Ale ; ape, ate, aye ; a-ble, a-corn, a-ged, 
 
 al-ien, an-cient, an-gel, az-ure ; a | 
 cot, brace-lets, pa-tri-ots, ma-tron, a-ri- 
 es, a-the-ism; fa-cing, ga-ble, hair-y, 
 cor-sair, sa-pi-ent, jail-or,dan-gers,];j 
 manger, na-ture, pa-trou, pears, sa-crcu, 
 square, za-ny. 
 
 9. Elocution, is an Art, that teaches 
 me how^ to manifest my fittings and 
 thoughts to others, in such a way as to 
 give them a true idea, and expression, 
 of horn and what I feel and think ; and in 
 so doing, to make thtm feel and think as 
 I do. Its object is to enable me to com • 
 mimicate to the hearers the whole truth. 
 just as it is ; in other words, to give me 
 the ability to do perfect justice to the 
 subject, to them, and to myself. 
 
 10. AandE having the same sound. 
 Care-ful, parents, ha-lp, gra-tife, pa 
 la-tent, ma-gi, sa-li-ent, lit-er-a-ti, mus- 
 ta-ches, harej dare, bear, cam-bric, fair, 
 na-tkwT-al, cater, chas-ten, "drain, {not 
 dreen,) nape, ra-tion-al, rai-sina, stairs, 
 sa-vor, to tear, bo-quet, hey-day, ere-long 
 eyre, ey-ry, hein-ous, heir, feint, hey- I 
 o-bei-sance, pray, scarce, trey, wh£y ; — 
 there and where with all their com- 
 pounds; as there-fore, wnere-fore, eV.c. 
 \Vhere-e;er I go, where-e'er I am, I ne'- 
 er will take their whey. 
 
 1 1 • The means to be used thus to m 
 known my feelings and thoughts, are 
 tones, words, looks, actions and silence : 
 whence it appears, that the body is the 
 grand medium of communication be- 
 tween myself anxl others ; far by and 
 through the bod^f are tones, words, looks 
 and gestures produced. Thus I perceive 
 that the mind is the active agent, and the 
 body the passive agent ; that this is the 
 instrument and that the 'performer. 
 
 Notes. — 1. Guard against carica- 
 turing this sound of a, before r. in the 
 same syllable, by giving it too much 
 stress and quantity m such wbrds as air, 
 pa-rent, dare, pare, chair, bear, <fcc; also 
 the prevalent custom of giving it ti fat 
 sound, like that often given to e, in the 
 word bleat. To do this sound justice, 
 drop the under jaw at least half an inch 
 and open the lips an inch, projecting them, 
 so as to bring the corners forward like 
 the* rim of a funnel, they, there, (their 
 and theyr,) whey, wheyr, (where). 2. Il 
 would be just as proper, in prose, to say, 
 '•where-ce-ver } go, where-ee-ver I am, 
 I flfig-ver shall see the more ;" as to say, 
 
in poetry, when abbreviated, "Where- 
 fce'-er I go. where-ee'-er I am. I ?iee'-v&r 
 
 shall see thee more ; : ' instead of — as in 
 the examples. 
 
 12.. The second sound of A is Grave, 
 or Italian. — Ah. alms>a'rc,are,arms,art, 
 aunt. a/-monds, ar-dent, ar-gent. ar-giie, 
 ar-te-ry. sar-sa-pa-ril-la, a gape, bairn, 
 pa-pa, fa-ther, halves, heart, psalm, 
 paths, qualm, salve, the ayes and noes, 
 a-re-na, ef-flu-via, laun-dress, bravo, de 
 
 es ; and they are formed by the organ*- 
 of voice ; these two things, then, de- 
 mand rny first and particular attention. 
 n-orus and voice ; words are composed of 
 letters, and the voice, is the effect of the 
 proper actions of certain parts of the 
 body, called vocal organs ; which two 
 might}' instruments, words and voice, 
 must be examined analytically and 
 synthetically. 
 
 IT. The third sound of A is Broad. 
 
 panel, ma-nil-la, calm, daunt, flaunt, ! or German — All; aught, awe, au-burn, 
 
 gaunt-let, half, jaunt, hearth, launch. 
 13, There are then, it appears, two 
 kinds of language, an artificial or con- 
 ventional language, consisting of words ; 
 
 and a natural language, consisting of 
 
 tones, looks, actions and silence; the ; thwart-ed. 
 
 auc-tion, aus-pice, aw-ful, awn-ing, al- 
 most, au-di-ble, au-di-ence, au-to-graph ; 
 bal-dric, dau-phin, fal-chion, gawk-y. 
 groat, daughter, law-less, nau-se-ous. 
 palfrey, sauce-box, Tau-rus, tea-sau-cer, 
 
 former is addressed to the e$e by the 
 book] and to the ear by speech, and must 
 thus be learned; the latter addresses 
 itseli to both eye and ear, at the same j 
 moment, and must be thus acquired, j 
 so far as they can be acquired. To be- 
 come an elocutionist I must learn both j 
 languages • that of art and science, 
 
 18. The more perfect the medium. 
 the better will it subserve the uses of 
 communication. Now, by analyzing 
 the constituents of words and voice, I 
 can ascertain whether they are in a con- 
 dition to answer the varied purposes for 
 which they were given : and fortunate- 
 ly for me. while I am thus analyzing the 
 
 and thai of the passions, to be used accor- j sounds of which words are composed, I 
 
 shall, at the same time, become acquain- 
 ted with the organs of voice and hearing, 
 and gradually accustom them to the per- 
 formance of their appropriate duties. 
 19. A and having the same sound.- 
 
 fting to rny subject and object 
 
 14, A is generally grave, when by 
 
 If, and at the end of words. A man 
 
 saw a horse in a held as he came a-long. 
 
 Li-ma, com-mand, a-bode, a-tone,No-an, 
 
 Se-lah, Cu-ba. I-o-ta, Sa-rah, Mec-ca, i Bau-ble, calk-er, drawl, fau-cit, h 
 
 Me-di-na, In-di-an-a, dog-ma, lam-i-n; 
 
 a di-p!o-ma, vii-ia, so-fa, neb-u-la, a 
 ibr-mu-la. craunch, guard, hah, haunt- 
 ed, jaun-d ice. daunt, rnaund, mam-ma, 
 ' haunch, pi-quaxit, par-tridge.taunt. saun- 
 ter, ma-ster, vaunt-eth, ba-na-na-tree. 
 
 15, In making the vowel sounds, 
 by expelling them, great care must be 
 taken to convert all the breath that is 
 emitted into pure sound, so as not to 
 chafe the internal surilice of the throat, 
 and produce a tickling or hoarseness. 
 The happier and freer from restraint the* 
 better; in laughing, the lower muscles, 
 are used involuntarily ; hence the a- 
 
 : \ ' Ian gl > and be fat . J In b reat h i n g, 
 reading and speaking, there should be 
 no rising of the shoulders, or heaving of 
 the bosom ; both tend to error and ill 
 health. Beware of using the lungs ; 
 let them act as they are acted upon by 
 the lower muscles. 
 
 10. Words, 1 see, are among the 
 principal means used for these purpos- 
 
 ! bought, lau-re-ate. pal-sey. saus-ag;_. 
 : ought, bal-sam, caught, shawms, maw,;- 
 ; ish. want, because, thought, sward, 
 soard.) taught, fought, plau-dit, wjfought 
 sauce-pan, cough, sought. All were 
 palled at the thraldom of Walter Rait 
 who was almost scalded m a caldron 
 water. 
 
 20. Since the body is the g 
 
 dium for communicating and 
 
 thoughts, as above mentioned, I must 
 see to it that each part performs its pi 
 er office, without infringement or 
 croachment. By observation and ex- 
 perience, I perceive that the mind uses 
 certain parts for specific purposes ; that 
 the larynx is the place where vocal 
 sounds are made, and that the power to 
 produce them is derived from the com- 
 bined action of the abdominal and v. 
 sal muscles. 
 
 21. The Fourth Sound or A r> 
 Short. — At: acts, adds, aft. and,, a: 
 apt, ash, asp, ab-bess, ab-ject. ac-c< 
 
&c-me, ac-tors, ad-age, ad verb, af-ter, a- 
 gate, al-ga, an-swers, an-thems, aspects, 
 at-las, ca-bal, bar-rel, rath-er, as-par-a- 
 gus, ap-par-el, ac-id, As-phal-tic, al-i-bi. 
 22. That the body may be free, to 
 act in accordance with the dictates of 
 mind, all unnatural compressions and 
 contractions must be avoided ; particu 
 
 26. E has Two RegtjLak Sotrifag*** 
 First, Name Sound, or long. — Eel: ear. 
 ease, eat, eke, ea-ger, ea-gle, ea-sej, ea 
 sy, e-den, e-dict, e-dile, e-gress, ei-ther. 
 e-poch, e-qual, e-ther, ev'n, e-vil ; e-pit- 
 o-me, e-go-tism,~e-quinox, ev'ri-tidfc, 
 shriek, prem-ier, tre-mor ; beard, fe- 
 brile, genial, hero, in-vei-gle, jeer, keel, 
 
 larly, cravats and stocks so tight around . lei-sure, nei-ther, pa>an, mead, teh-hee, 
 the neck, as to interfere with the proper j weal ; de-crease, bleat, creak, pierce, 
 action of the vocal organs, or larynx j] ne-gro, ple-na-ry, se-cre-tion ; the era 
 
 also, tight waistcoats ; double suspen- 
 ders, made tighter with straps ; elevat- 
 ing the feet to a point horizontal with, 
 or above, the seat ; and lacing, of any 
 description, around the waist, impeding 
 the freedom of breathing naturally. 
 
 23. A Short. — Bade, en-am-el, for- 
 bade, fa-cil-i-ty, gal-ax-y, jave-lin, mal^- 
 con^tent, mal-e-factor, chance, grasp, ca- 
 nal, cnant, japan, "fal-low, gran-a-ry, 
 radish, block and tackle, tar-iff, bal-sam- 
 ic, plaster, rap-id, guar-an-tee, rail-le-ry, 
 scath'd, mat-ter, plaid, ca-pa-ci-ty \ past, 
 shaft, staff, tas-sel, wag-on, Ath-ens, 
 dance, France, Feb-ru-a-ry, 
 
 24. Having examined the structure 
 » * of the body, I see the, necessity of stand- 
 ing, at first, on the left foot, and the 
 right foot a few inches from it, where it 
 will naturally fall when raised up, and 
 pointing its heel toward the hollow of 
 the left foot ; of throwing the shoulders 
 back, so as to protrude the. chest, that 
 the air may have free access to the air- 
 cells of the lungs ; of having the upper 
 part of the body quiescent, and the mind 
 concentrated on ttye lower muscles, un- 
 til they will act voluntarily. 
 
 25. Beware of clipping this sound 
 of A, or improperly changing it : espec- 
 ially, in such words as T c'n go ; you 
 c'n see ; they c'n come ; instead of — I 
 can go ; you can see • they can come ; 
 also, he cun hear, for he can heal', &c. 
 Only open the mouth wide, and all such 
 errors can be avoided ; but do not lay 
 unnecessary stress on them in trying 
 to pronounce correctly. 
 
 A, as in ate, in verbs, is alwa} r s long ; 
 but in other parts of speech, of more 
 than 1 syllable, it is generally short, un- 
 less it is under the full accent, or half 
 accent. Examples by contrast ; Did 
 you intimate that to my intimate friend ? 
 Appropriate that to your own appro- 
 priate use. 
 
 of me-te-ors pre-cedes the e-poch of tre- 
 mors. 
 
 27. I observe that there are three dis- 
 tinct principles involved in words, which 
 are their essences, or vowel sounds ; 
 their forms, or the consonants attached 
 to them, and their meaning, or uses. By 
 a quick ^ com bined action of the lower 
 muscles* upon their contents, the dia- 
 phragm is elevated so as to force the 
 air, or breath, from the lungs into the 
 windpipe, and through the larynx, where 
 it is converted into vowel sounds, and 
 as they pass out through the mouth, the 
 glottis, epiglottis, palate, tongue, teeth, 
 lips and nose, make them into words. 
 
 28. E land Y having the same sound.— 
 Ceil, least, neice, creak, fa-tigue, ca- 
 price, beard, inag-a-zine, po-lice, /c-ri- 
 al, shire, me-ri-no. bas-ule, shriek, man- 
 da-rine, pe-lisse, ra-vine, sleek, clean 
 tell, fTejgcL, pier, sheik, co-te-rie, va-lise, 
 quar-an-tine, creek, pierce, an-tique. 
 bom-ba-zine, u-nique, ma-chine, frieze, 
 cav-a-lier ; y-clad, yea yea and nay nay - 
 
 29* As much depends on the quality 
 01 which any thing is made, I must at- 
 tend to the manner in Which these sounds 
 are produced, and see that they are made 
 just right, each having its appropriate 
 weight, form and quantity. Taking 
 the above position, and opening the 
 mouth wide, turning" my lips a little out 
 all round, trumpet fashion, and keeping 
 my eyes on a horizontal level, and in- 
 haling full breaths, I will expel these 
 sixteen vowel sounds into the roof of 
 the mouth, with a suddenness and force 
 similar to the crack of a thong, or the 
 sound of a gun. 
 
 30. The Second sound of E ts 
 Short.— Ell : edge, oft, egg, eld, et, 
 elm, else, err, erst, etch 3 eb-on, ear-ly, 
 ear-nest, earthen, earth-quake, ech-o, 
 ed-dy, ed-it, ed-f-ble, ef-flux, ef-fort, em- 
 i blem, eph-od, ermine, eq-ui-page, epic, 
 
€l-der, em-press, es-cape, es-cort, es- 
 quire, es-say, es-sence, es-tate, eth-ics. 
 
 31. In these peculiar exercises of 
 voice are contained all the elements, or 
 principles, of articulation, accent, empha- 
 sis and expression ; and by their aid, 
 with but little exertion, I shall be ena- 
 bled to husband my breath for protrac- 
 ted vocal efforts, and impart all that 
 animation, brilliancy and force, that 
 reading, speaking, and singing ever re- 
 quire. 
 
 32. Short Sound of E.— Ex-cel-lence, 
 cer-tain, deaf, gen-er-al, heard, her-o- 
 ism, jeop-ard, ped-es-tal, reg-let, sen-na, 
 were, wet, yerk, yet, zeal-ous; bev-el, 
 clean-ly dearth, fes-tal, in-tel-li-gent, 
 jerk, leg-end, neg-li-gence, pref-ace, 
 ster-e-o-type, tep-id, weap-ons, best-ial, 
 dem-o-crat, clench ; shek-eis, get, her- 
 o-ine, per-fect, ret-i-na, ket-tle, prel-ude, 
 ret-ros-pect, spec-ial, rec-on-dite, steady, 
 ten-ets, learn, in-stead, yeast. 
 
 Note.— 1. It is exceedingly important 
 to open wide the mouth in order to give 
 this sound of E in many of our words, 
 especially when it is followed by a single 
 K ; otherwise, it will be liable to run 
 into short U : however, it is better to 
 pronounce it like short TJ, than like long 
 A: as murcy instead of mayrcy. 2.E, 
 in ents and ence and ess, is always short, 
 and should never be pronounced unce, 
 andiss. 3. Watch over theE, in final 
 unaccented syllables, and give it this 
 sound, unless silent or followed by R : 
 when it is like short TJ, or rather nearly 
 suppressed, as har per, sis ter, &c. 
 
 33. The vowel sounds are the audible 
 mediums for the manifestation of ener- 
 gy and feeling ; and these expulsive ef- 
 forts to produce them, contribute very 
 much to the developement of the vocal 
 powers, and the promotion of health, by 
 restoring the peristaltic action, aiding 
 the secretions of 'the liver, and invigora- 
 ting the pulmonary apparatus, for the 
 purification of the blood and natural 
 breathing ; that there may be a sound 
 body for a sound mind. 
 
 34. A, E, I, U, and Y having the 
 same sound. — Ebb: an-y-thing, man-y, 
 says, a-gain, a-gainst, girl, said, for-get, 
 home-stead, bur-y-ing ground, bur-i-al 
 ser-vice, sen-tence, guer-don, ter-ma- 
 garit, heif-er, tram-pet, non-pa-rcil, dcf- 
 
 t,pan<e gyrist.. 
 
 35. These vocal gymnastics produce 
 astonishing power and flexibility of 
 voice, making it strong, clear, liquid, 
 musical and governable ; and they are 
 as healthful as they are useful and 
 amusing. As there is only one straight 
 course to any point, so, there is but one 
 right way of doing any thing, and eve- 
 ry thing. If I wish to do any thing well, 
 I must first learn how ; and if I begin 
 right, and keep so, every step will carry 
 me forward in accomplishing my objects. 
 
 36. The difference between expulsion 
 and explosion is, that the latter calls in- 
 to use, principally, the lungs, or thorax ; 
 i. e. the effort is made too much above 
 the diaphram : the former requires the 
 combined action of the muscles below 
 the mh/driff ; this is favorable to voice 
 and health ; that is deleterious generally, 
 to both : many a one has injured his 
 voice, by this unnatural process, and 
 others have exploded their health, and 
 some their life ; beware of it ! 
 
 Notes : do not give the sound of short 
 i. or w, to this sound of e, in final unac< 
 cented syllables; as trumpet, lancet, 
 business, sickness, darkness ; basement, 
 planet, gar-ment, payment, &c, in 
 ence, ent, ess, &c., the e is always short. 
 It is silent in the last syllables of broken, 
 deafen, driven, deep en, even, i-dle, grav- 
 el, shov el, shekel, swiv le, weasel, (often 5 
 soften, t and e silent,) shaken, taken, 
 sicken, ripen, seven, stiffen, roughen, 
 snivel, novel, ov-en, o-pen, a-ble, ti-tle. 
 
 37. I has Two regular SouiNns. First 
 Name sound, or Long. — Isle : ides, vice, 
 i-cy, i-dem, i-dle, is-iet, i-tem, i-dol-ize, 
 i-o-dine, Aisle; Chi-na, fright, gil 
 house-wife, li-lach,mi-cro-scope, o-blige 
 si-ne-cure, thyme, vi-vavo-ce, writhe ; 
 Gen-tiles, en-vi-ron, ho-ri-son, length- 
 wise, grind-stone, spike-nard, le-vi-a- 
 than, ma-gi, di-ges\, e-dile sa-li-va, fo- 
 ci, ti-ny, ob-lique-ly, si-ne di-e. 
 
 Note. — Now when 1 commences a 
 word and is in a syllable by itself, if the 
 accent be on the succeeding syllable, it 
 is generally long : as ; i dea, i den ti ty, 
 i dol a try, i ras ci ble, i ron i cal, i tal ic, 
 itin e rant, &c. It is long in the first 
 syllables of vi tal i ty, di am e ter, di ur- 
 nal, tri bit nal, di 1cm ma, bi en in a!, 
 in te ri on, chi me ra, bi og ra phy, Li* 
 cen tious, gi gan tic, pri me val, vi 
 tion, &c. 
 
38. Two grand objects are— to cor- 
 rect bad habits, and form good ones ; 
 which may be done by the practice of 
 analysis and synthesis ; that is, taking 
 compound sounds, syllables, words and 
 sentences into pieces, or resolving them 
 into their component parts, and then re- 
 combining or putting them together 
 again. Error must be eradicated, or 
 truth cannot be received ; what is true 
 cannot be received, only in proportion as 
 its opposite false is removed. 
 
 39. 1 and Y sounding alike. — A-rise, 
 aw-ry, chyle, ally, nice-ty, de-my, fe- 
 line, ly-ce-um, dy.nas-ty, to proph-e-cy, 
 cy-cle, oc-cu-py, o-blige, bi-ped, height, 
 li-vre, ti-a-ra, rhi-no, vi-de, tri-ad, sleight 
 bi-na-ry, ' Ar-gives, chyme, ex-pe-dite, 
 t.y-po-graph-i-cal ; we magnify the faults 
 of others, and minify our own. 
 
 40. Articulation — is the cutting out, 
 and shaping, in a perfectly distinct and 
 appropriate manner, with the organs of 
 speech, all the simple and compound 
 sounds^ which our twenty -six letters rep- 
 resent. It is to the ear what a fair hand 
 wilting is to the eye, and relates, of 
 course, to both vowels and consonants. 
 It depends on the exact positions and 
 correct operations, of the vocal powers, 
 and the ability to vary them with rapidi- 
 ty, precision and effect . 
 
 41. The Second sound of I is short. - 
 III : ink, im-age, ol-ive, pal-a-tine, 
 pris-tine, vol-a-tile, cow-ard-ice, rap-mg, 
 jes-sa-mine, des-tine, in-quest, ist/z-mus, 
 ig-no-rant, ^-pe-tus, im-pli-cate, in-cu- 
 bus, ir-ri-gate ? in-ti-mate, in-sti-gate, i^- 
 o-late, in-di-vis-a-bil-i-ty, ip-se-dix-it, ir- 
 ri-ta-bil-i-ty, pre-des-tine, rep-tile. 
 
 42. The organs of speech are,the dor- 
 sal and abdominal muscles, the dia- 
 phragm and intercostal muscles, the 
 thorax or chest, the lungs, the trachia 
 or wind pipe, the larynx, composed of 
 five elastic cartilages, the upper one be- 
 ing the epiglottis, the glottis, palate, 
 tongue, teeth, lips and nose- in other 
 words, the whole body. All vowel sounds 
 are made in the larynx, or vocal box, 
 and all the consonant sounds above this 
 organ- 
 ic, 1, 0,Ufy Y, having the same sound. 
 
 England, pretty, treble ; spirit, wom-en, 
 bus-y, business, ad-a-man-tine, di-vert, 
 fertile, eg-lan-tine gen-u-ine, hos-tile, 
 ju-ve-nile, lib-er-tine, pu-er-ile, rinse ; 
 
 ser-vile, trib-une, cyn-o-sure, my-sclf, 
 wind, (air,) in-fi-nite-ly, dis-ci-pline, 
 hos.tile, mer-can-lile, ahi-ca-ner-y, tyr- 
 an-ny. I, in final unaccented syllable 
 not ending a word, is generally short ; 
 si-mil-i-tude, fi-del-i-ty. 
 
 43. A correct and pure articulation, 
 is indispensable to the public speaker,and 
 essential in private, conversation : eve- 
 ry one, therefore, should make himself 
 master of it. All, who are resolved to 
 acquire such an articulation, and faith- 
 fully use the proper means, which are 
 here furnished in abundance, will most 
 certainly succeed, though opposed by 
 slight organic defecjs ; for the mind may 
 obtain supreme control over the whole 
 body. 
 
 44. J and Y sounded alike— Cyg-net r 
 dj-rect, syn-o-nymes, di-late, ar-tif-i-cer. 
 lib-er-ty, fi-del-ity, styg-i-an, Lib-ji-nus, 
 li-tig-ous, me-^-cin-al, pyr-i-tes, sul-lied 
 lic-o-rice, ban-died, pit-ied, stud-diecl, 
 pro-file, ri-gid-i-ty, a prbph-e-cy, res- 
 pite, ""an-tip-o-des, mas-cu-line, fem-i- 
 nine, ser-vil-i-ty, con-spir-a-cy, vi-cin-i- 
 ty, Ty-thag-o-ms, plan-tain, vil-lain. 
 
 Notes. — Beware of Mr. Walker's er- 
 ror, in giving the sound of long E to the 
 final unaccented I and Y of syllables 
 and words, which is always short : as, — 
 as-per-ee-tee, for as-per-i-ty, mee-nor-ee- 
 tee, for mi-nor-i-ty ; char-ee-tee, for 
 char-i-ty; pos-see-bil-ee-tee, for pos-si- 
 bil-i-ty; &c. Some give the short 
 sound of I to A in the unaccented syla- 
 bles of— ad-age, cab-bage, bon-dage, u- 
 sage, &c, which is agreeable to the au- 
 thorities. I is silent in evil, devzl, cous- 
 in, basm, &c. 
 
 45. Curran, a celebrated Irish orator, 
 presents us with a signal instance of 
 what can be accomplished by assiduity 
 and perseverance ; his enunciation was 
 so precipitate, and confused, that he was 
 called " stuttering lack Curran ." To 
 overcome his numerous defects, he de- 
 voted a portion of every day to reading 
 and reciting aloud, slowly and distinctly, 
 some of the most eloquent extracts in 
 our language ; and his success was so 
 complete, that among his excellences, 
 as a speaker, was the clearness of his 
 articulation, and an appropriate intona- 
 tion, that melodized every sentence. 
 
 46. has Three Regular Sounds. — 
 First, Name sound or long. — Old : oats. 
 
oaths, odes, oar, ope, ore, ocean, o-chre, 
 o-gle, o-men, on-ly, onyx, o-pal, oval, 
 o-yer, os-ier, o-li-o, tal-low, pil-low, 
 broach, cope, doge, florist,, forge, gross, 
 loam, hordes, pour, Rome, sloth, fal- 
 low, whole, pre-co-cious, so-ia, Pha-roah 
 tro-phy, de-co-rus, a-tro-cius, po-ten-tate 
 homely, yolk. 
 
 47. Oratory — in all its refinement, 
 and necessary circumstances, belongs 
 to no particular people, to the exclusion 
 of others • nor is it the gift of nature, 
 more than other acquirements ; but the 
 reward of arduous efforts, under the gui- 
 dance of consummate skill. Perfection 
 in this art, as well as in all others, is a 
 work of time and labor , prompted by true 
 feeling, and guided, by correct thought. 
 
 48. 0, Edu, Ew and &w having the 
 same sound.— Bourne, gloam, bu-reau, 
 y el-low, wid-ow ; hau-teur, pa-trol, por- 
 trait, gold-smith, port-man-teau, corps, 
 (core,) woad, co-coa, pro-pose, strew'd, 
 pa-trol, chat-eaw, flam-beau:?,, sew, shew- 
 bread, hau^-boy, yeo-man-ry, though, 
 fellow, min-nows, quo-tient, chev-auz- 
 de-frise, wont, (will not,) Job. 
 
 49. Lord Mans field, when quite young 
 used to recite the orations of Demos- 
 thenes'; on his native mountains ; he al- 
 so practiced before Mr. Pope, the poet, 
 for the benefit of his criticisms ; and the 
 consequence was, his melodious voice, 
 and graceful diction, made as deep an 
 impression, as the beauties of his style 
 and excellence of his matter, and ob- 
 tained for him the appellation of " the 
 silver toned Murray" 
 
 50. THE SECOND SOUND OF IS CALLED 
 
 close. — Ooze: oo-zy, ou-tre; boo-by, 
 loom, boor, broods, do, goose, group, 
 hoop, food, schools, soothe, who ; ac- 
 coutre, be-hoove, choose, dou-ceur.gam- 
 boge, gour-mand, noo-dle, prove, rook, 
 shoe, (not shu,) tour-ist, trou-ba-dour, 
 woof; ca- pouch, boon, dra-goon, schoon- 
 er, soon, soot, (not sut,) soup, buo-yant, 
 cou-ri-er, droop, stook, sur-tout. 
 
 51. Dean Kir wan, a celebrated pul- 
 pit orator, was so thoroughly convinced 
 of the importance of manner, as an in- 
 strument of doing good, that he careful- 
 ly studied all his tones and gestures ; 
 and his well modulated and command- 
 ing voice, his striking attitudes, and his 
 varied emphatic action, greatly aided 
 fib wing-ed words, in instructing, melt- 
 
 ing, inflaming, terrifying and overwhel- 
 ming his auditors. 
 
 52. and U sounded alike. — Gal-loon, 
 tour-ney, croup, car-touch, tour-na-ment 
 ou-sel, par-a-mour, rou-tine, ca-noe, 
 con-tour, hoof, whoop,Broughm , (Broom ) 
 un-couth, roof, a-maur, che/-de'auver, 
 (she doovr, a-master-stroke,) coup : de 
 main, (a sudden attack,) cou^-d'oeil, 
 (coo-dale, the first or slight view,) coxxp- 
 de-grace, (coo-de-grass, the finishing 
 stroke,) ma-neu-vre. 
 
 53. Attend tothe»quantity and quali- 
 ty of the sounds, which you and others 
 make ; that is, the volume and purity 
 of voice, the time occupied, and the 
 manner of enunciating letters, words 
 and sentences ; also, learn their differ- 
 ences and distinctions, and make your 
 voice produce, and your ear observe them. 
 Get clear and distinct ideal and con- 
 ceptions of things and principles, both as 
 it respects spirit and matter, or you will 
 grope in darkness. 
 
 54. The third sound of is shout. — 
 On : off,or,orbs,ox ; ob-jects,oc-taves, ol- 
 ives, om bre, ome let, op tics, or ange, 
 or chards, or gies, or nate, ob e lisk, ob- 
 se quies, oc u lar, od dity, bronze," coll- 
 ier, do cile, for head, glob-ule, mon ade, 
 non age, pro cess, north, prod uce, 
 knowl edge, pro gress, ros in, shone. 
 
 Notes. — 1. The in nor is like in 
 on and ot : and the reason why it appears 
 to be different is that the letter R, when 
 smooth, being formed the lowest in the 
 throat of any of the consonants partakes 
 more of the properties of the vowel than- 
 the rest. 2. is silent in the final syl- 
 lables of prison, damson, mason, par- 
 son, sexton, arson, blazon, glutton, par- 
 don, button, reason, mutton, bacon, 
 treason, reckon, season unison, horison, 
 crimson, lesson, person, Milton, Johnson, 
 Thompson, &c. 
 
 55. Elocution, is reading and speaking 
 with science and effect. It consists of 
 two parts ; Science, or its true princi- 
 ples, and Art, or the method of present- 
 ing it. Science is the knowledge of 
 Art, and Art is the practice of Science. 
 By science, or knowledge, we know how 
 to do a thing ; and the doing of it is the 
 art. Or, science is the parent, and art 
 is the offspring ; or, science is the sad 
 and art the plant. 
 
 5G. and A pronounced alike.— Cot als 
 
8 
 
 qual i ty, sol ace, pro ducts, what, cough, 
 com bat, pro cess, trode, jo cund, corpse, 
 was, peu te cost, be yond, squash,hol y- 
 day, quan ti ty, war rant, squan der, 
 trough, quar rel wad die, wars, squabs, 
 swans, yac/i?,Wasp, swamp,lau rel, wash. 
 
 57* Yield an implicit obedience to all 
 rules and principles, that are founded in 
 nature and science ; because, ease, 
 gracefulness and efficiency, always fol- 
 low accuracy ; but rules may be dis- 
 pensed with, when you have become di- 
 vested of bad habits, and perfected your- 
 self in this glorious art. Do not, how- 
 ever, destroy the scaffold, until you have 
 erected the building ; nor erect the super- 
 structuie till you have dug deep, and 
 laid its foundation stones upon a rock. 
 
 ^otes.— Beware of Walker's erron- 
 eous notation in pronouncing oo in book, 
 cook, took, look, &c, like the second 
 sound of o, as in boon, pool, tooth, &c, 
 in these first examples the oo is like u in 
 pull ; and in the latter the o is close. To 
 give the vowel sounds euphoneously, be 
 particular in protruding the lips. In 
 the word to, in the following, when it 
 constitutes a part of the verb, the o is 
 close : as — in the examples alluded to : 
 attend to the exceptions. 
 
 58. To and Me are long before vowels, 
 but abbreviated before consonants, (unless 
 emphatic,) to prevent a hiatus. Th' 
 man took the instrument and began t' 
 play th' tune, when th' guests were rea- 
 dy to eat. I have written to Obadiah t' 
 send me some of th' wheat that was 
 brought in th' ship Omar, and which 
 grew on th' land belonging t' th' family 
 of the Ashlands. Are you going from 
 town? No, I am going to town. Th' 
 vessel is insured to, at &wlfrom London. 
 
 59. U HA.S THREE REGULAR SOUNDS. 
 
 First, Name Sound, or Long. — Blue; 
 .cube, due, juice, lieu, sluice, tube, beau- 
 ty, cu rate, lu cent, mu sic, stu pid, tu- 
 nic; cu bic, feud, glue, huge, ju bi lee, 
 mu lat to, nui sance, past ure, ten ure, 
 u rim, venture: sin gu lar, cal cu late, 
 ap per ture, a cw-men, as tute, tri bu nal, 
 lu cu bra tions, ju di ca ture, lieu ten ant. 
 
 60. It is not the quantity read, but the 
 manner of reading, and the acquisition 
 of correct and efficient rules, with the 
 ability to apply them accurately, grace- 
 fully and involuntarily, that indicate 
 progress in these arts : therefore, take 
 
 one principle, or combination of princi- 
 ples, at a time/and practice it till the 
 object is accomplished j in this way, 
 you may obtain a perfect mastery over 
 your vocal powers, and all the elements 
 of language. 
 
 Notes. — 1. U, when long at the be- 
 ginning of a word, or syllable, is prece- 
 ded by the consonant sound of Y : i. e. 
 it has this consonant sound and its own 
 vowel sound : as ; u ni verse, (yu ni- 
 verse,) pen u ry, (pen yu ry,; stat u a- 
 ry, (stat yu ary,) vol ume. (vol yume.) 
 na ture, (nat yure,) foe but not in col- 
 umn, al um, <fec. where the U is short. 
 
 2. Never pronounce duty, dooty ; tune, 
 toon ; news, noos ; blue, bloo ; slew, 
 sloo j dews, dooz ; jews, jooze ; tues- 
 day, toosday ; gratitude, gratitoode : &,c. 
 
 3. Sound all the syllables full, for a 
 time, regardless of sense, and make eve- 
 ry letter that is not silent, tell truly and 
 fully, on the ear ; there is no danger but 
 you will clip them enough in practice. 
 
 61. U aadEw sounded alike. — A new, 
 re fuse, as kew, en due, news, re- views, 
 am a teur, a dieu, a gue and fever, (not 
 fever nager,) co ad ju tor, June, feu clal, 
 con nois seur, cu cum ber, (not cow cum 
 ber,) dew, yew tree, view, pen te teuch, 
 ed u cate, suit a ble, cal cu late, bar ba 
 cue,; the new tune suits the Duke. 
 
 62. By Analysis — sounds, syllables, 
 words, and sentences are resolved into 
 their constituent parts ; to each is giv- 
 en its own peculiar sound, force, quality, 
 or meaning ; and thus, every shade of 
 vocal coloring, of thought and feeling, 
 may be seen and felt. By Synthesis, 
 these parts are again re-united, and pre- 
 sented in all their beautiful and har- 
 monious combinations, exhibiting all 
 the varieties of perception, thought and 
 emotion, that can be produced by the 
 human mind. 
 
 63. The second sound of V is Short. 
 Up : urge, ul-tra, um ber, unc tion, ur- 
 chin, ush er, ul ti mate, bluff, gums, 
 doub le, ful crum, grudge, hus band, 
 jour nal, mur ky, numb skull, scull ion, 
 thurs day, cour te ous, des ul to ry, col- 
 umn, ful some, due at, coup le, your- 
 self, tur tie, cour te sy, tre men dous, 
 tough, slough, South em. 
 
 64. Avoid rapidity and indistinctness 
 of utterance ; also a drawling, thick, 
 mincing, harsh, mouthing, hurried;, ar- 
 
9 
 
 tificiai, sqeaking, rumbling, monotonous 
 droning, whining, stately, pompous, 
 clattering, unvaried, wavering, sleepy, 
 hissing, boisterous, labored, formal, dis- 
 cordant, faltering, trembling, heavy, 
 theatrical, affected and self-complacent 
 manner ; and read, speak, sing in a clear 
 strong, melodious, flexible, winning, 
 bold, sonorous, attractive, forcible, round; 
 lull, open, brilliant, natural, agreeable, 
 and mellow tone, as the sentiment re- 
 quires : which contains in itself so sweet 
 a charm that it almost atones for the 
 absence of argument, sense and fancy. 
 
 Notes. — 1. E, and U, final, are silent 
 in such words as, bogue, vague, eclogue 
 synagogue, plague, catalogue, rogue, 
 demagogue, &c. 2. Do j ustice to every 
 letter and word, and as soon think of 
 stepping backward and forward in 
 walking, as to repronounce your words in 
 reading : nor should you call the words 
 incorrectly, any sooner than you would 
 put on your shoes for your hat, or your 
 bonnet for your shawl. 3. A, E, 6, in 
 certain unaccented syllables, have a 
 sound neariy resembling short U ; as, 
 bedlam, bidder, scorpion, compass, mi- 
 ser, wagon, &c. 
 
 65. U, A, E, I, 0, and F, sounded 
 alike. ~- Just, come, bulk, done, front, 
 gloves, monk, loves, quoth, com rades, 
 must, does, cov ets, noth ing, com pass, 
 doth, shove, such, on ions, col an der, 
 a bove, moth er, com fort, hon ey, bomb, 
 none, oth ers, shov els, tongues, words, 
 slov en, gov ern, dost, some, tons, coz en, 
 sur geon, sponge, com pa ny, stom ach, 
 worms, en vel op, col or, squir rel, tav- 
 ern, myr tie, martyr, horror, bed lam, 
 hus band, rob ber, plun der, w r on der. 
 
 G6. The late Mr. Pitt, Lord Chatham, 
 was taught to declaim, when a mere 
 boy ; and was, even then, much admir- 
 ed for his talent in recitation : the result 
 of which was, that his ease, grace, pow- 
 er, self possession and imposing dignity, 
 on his first appearance in the British 
 Parliament, < drew audience and atten- 
 tion still as night.' 
 
 67. The third sound of U is broad. — 
 Full : bruise, crude, fruit, prude, rue. 
 truth, bru tal, cm el, dm id, fru gal, 
 gru el, pru dent, ru ler, tru ism, could 
 im brue, scru ti ny, should, wound ed, 
 rule, pul pit, ru mor, cm ci t'y, through, 
 tru ant, pud ding, youth ful, thank ful, 
 
 plen ti ful, grace fui, cuck coo, put, de- 
 light ful, faith ful, won der ful . 
 
 68. Elocution — comprehends expul- 
 sion of sound. Articulation, Pronuncia- 
 tion, Accent, Pauses, Measure and Mel- 
 ody, of Speech, Rythmus, Emphasis, the 
 eight notes, Intonation, Inflexions, Cir- 
 cumflexes, Cadences, Dynamics, Modu- 
 lation, Style, the Passions and Rhetori- 
 cal Action. Reading and Speaking be- 
 ing inseparably connected with music, 
 every step taken in the former, according 
 to this system, will advance one as man)" 
 in the latter ; for Music is but an elegant 
 and refined species of Elocution. 
 
 69. 77, Erv, 0, and Oo y pronounced 
 alike — Brutus, es chew, wolf, stood, pul- 
 ling, chew, good, brew, crew, huz za, 
 re emit, shrewd, worst ed, Prus sia, 
 cook, wo man, wol sey, with stood, wool- 
 en, crook ed, shook, Ruth, Wor ces ter. 
 crook, butch er ; you, your, . and your- 
 self, when emphatic ; do you say it ; i; 
 is not your book ; you may take care of 
 yohr self, and I will take care of my self. 
 
 TO. Demosthenes paid many. thou- 
 sands to a teacher in Elocution ; and 
 Cicero, after having completed his edu- 
 cation, in other respects, spent two whole 
 years in recitation, under one of the most 
 celebrated tragedians of antiquity. Bru- 
 tus declared, he would prefer the honor 
 of being esteemed the master of Roman 
 eloquence,to the glory of many' triumphs. 
 
 Notes — 1. Beware of omitting vow- 
 els occuring between consonants in un- 
 accented syllables : as. hist'ry, for his- 
 to ry ; lit'ral, for lit er al ; vot'ry, for 
 vo ta ry ; past'rol, for pas to ral ; num'- 
 bring, for num ber ing ; corp'ral, for 
 cor po ral ; general, for gen e ral ; 
 mem'ry, for mem o ry ; &c. 2. Do not 
 pronounce this ^sound ofU like 00 in 
 boon, nor like u in mute, but like U in 
 full: as, chew, not choo, &c. 3. C 
 tion. — Persons of delicate health should 
 not practice long at a time, till they 
 know what efforts 10 make. 
 
 71. Dipthonzs.—Q]. and Oy : — coy. 
 oil, toy, boy, hoist, hoy. join, cloy, point. 
 spoil, loin, toil, broil, coin, joint, quoit, 
 an noy, clois ter. toi ble, I03 a I. oinl ment. 
 poi son, sub join, toi Let, a noint, bols- 
 ter ous, ile spoil, em ploy, hoi den, loi- 
 ter, moiety, pur loin, quoins, royal, 
 voit uiv. a droit, oys ter, voyage, soil, 
 loi ter, poise, res er voir, clois ter. 
 
10 
 
 3 2. A Dipthong, or double sound, is 
 tile union of two vowel sounds in one 
 syllable, pronounced by a single effort 
 of the voice. There are four dipthongal 
 sounds in our language ; long 1 as in 
 Isle ; 01, in oil ; the pure or long sound 
 of u in lure, and ou in our ; which in- 
 clude the same sounds under the forms 
 of long y in rhyme ; of oy in coy ; of cw 
 in pew, and ow in how. These dip- 
 thongs are always pure, because they 
 are all heard; and in speaking and 
 singing, the radical, or opening full- 
 ness of the sound, only, should be pro- 
 longed or sung. 
 
 Note.— There is a certain place in 
 the throat, called the larynx-, which con- 
 tains the vocal chords, where voice sounds 
 are made ; another place, called the 
 glottis, which is a small opening above 
 the larynx, that shapes these sounds 
 into specific vowels, of which we have 
 sixteen ; requiring only as many con- 
 formations, in speech, or song : thus the 
 larynx furnishes the cloth, and the glot- 
 tis cuts it up in particular pieces ; while 
 the consonant organs, like faithful tai- 
 lors, make them into proper garments, 
 in which to clothe our ideas : hence, 
 language is the dress of our thoughts. 
 
 73. 60 andOw. Ounce, our, 011 st,out, 
 bound, couch, chow der, found, giaour, 
 howl, mound, pow er, shroud, mount, 
 brow, sour, owl, rouse, sound, vouch, 
 wound, (did wind,) bow er, flow er, 
 pound, tower; cloud, doughty, frouzy, 
 gout, show er, scowl, drowned, (not 
 drown ded.) foun der, prow ess. 
 
 Notes. — There is a very incorrect 
 and offensive sound given by some to 
 this dipthong, particularly in the North- 
 ern States, in consequence of drawing 
 the corners of the mouth back, and keep- 
 ing the teeth too close, while pronounc- 
 ing it ; it may be called a flat nasal 
 sound: in song it is worse than in speech. 
 It may be represented as follows — keou, 
 neou, geoun, peour, deoun, keounty, 
 sheowr, &c. Good natured laughing 
 people, living in cold climates, where 
 faey wish to keep the mouth nearly 
 closed, are often' guilty of this vul- 
 garity. It may be avoided by opening 
 the mouth wide,projecting the under jaw 
 and making the sound deep in the throat. 
 
 74. There are no impure dipthongs or 
 tripthongs, in which two or three vow- 
 
 els represent or unite, in one sound ; for 
 all are silent except one ; as m air, aimt, 
 awl, plaid, steal, lead, pie, curtain, soar, 
 good, your, co^gh, feu dal, dun geon, 
 beauty, a dieu, view ing. These silent 
 letters, in connection with the vocals. 
 should be called di graphs and tri graphs; 
 i. e. doubly and triply written ; they 
 sometimes merely indicate the sound of 
 the accompanying vowel, and the deri- 
 vation of the word. Let me beware of 
 believing any thing, miles I can see that 
 it is true ; for the evidence of truth, I will 
 look at the truth itself. 
 
 75. All the vowel sounds, twice told. — 
 James Parr, 'Hall Mann, Eve Prest, Ike 
 Sill, Old Pool Forbes, Luke Munn Bull, 
 and Hoyle Prout, ate palms, walnuts, 
 apples, peaches, melons,ripe figs, cocoas, 
 gooseberries, hops, cucumbers, prunes, 
 and sourcrout, to their entire satisfac- 
 tion. Ale, ah, all, at ; eel, ell ; isle, ill; 
 old, ooze, on ; mute, up, full ; oil, ounce. 
 Now let me repeat all these VQwel sounds 
 consecutively : A. A. A A; E,E; I. 
 
 I ; 0. 0. ; U. U. U ; Oi. Oil. 
 
 76. Vowels Pponounced Separate- 
 ly.— In pronouncing the following 
 words, I must be very deliberate, so as 
 to shape the vowels perfectly, and give 
 every sound clearly and distinctly ; and 
 in all the examples, here and elsewhere, 
 make those sounds, w T hich are the special 
 object of attention, the most prominent. 
 
 77. A e ro naut, Ba al. co pi o\is ly, 
 fe al ty, i ta, hyme ne al, Man tu a. 
 ne ol o gy, ri ent, pit e ous ly, se ri es, 
 va ri e gate, zo ol o gy, Ap pi i, Fo rum, 
 Be el ze bub, era ni um, di a mond, cas- 
 si a, di a dem, a ri es, Eu ro pe an, 
 ge og ra phy, me li o rate, ge ni i, mal- 
 le a ble, Pom pe i, in cho ate, em py re- 
 an, a pri ori, (from cause to effect,) pan- 
 a ce a, vi o lent ly, hy a cinth, i {jp a, 
 vi o lent, vi o let, lin e a ment. 
 
 78. Preventives and curatives are 
 found in the positions and exercises, re- 
 commended above and below. There 
 are three modes of operating upon dis- 
 ease ; first, most interiorly through the 
 nervous system, by direct efforts of the 
 mind : secondly, interiorly by diet and 
 medicine ; (for it is necessary some- 
 times to take medicine, tho' a very little 
 will suffice if properly taken :) and third- 
 ly, exteriorly, by bathing in rain wa- 
 ter, and friction after being wiped dry; 
 
11 
 
 for which purpose no other apparatus is 
 necessary than a wash bowl, and a com- 
 mon and coarse towel. Whatever will 
 restore the system to order, acts medi- 
 cinally, whether mind, temperance or 
 exercise. 
 
 79. Reading by vowel sounds only ; 
 analagous to singing by note, insteadof 
 by word. This is an exceedingly inter- 
 esting and important exercise : it is done 
 simply by omiting the consonants and 
 pronouncing the vowels the same as 
 in their respective words. First, pro- 
 nounce one or more words, and then re- 
 pronounce them and leave off the con- 
 sonants. The vowels constitute the es- 
 sence of words, and- the consonants give 
 taht material the proper form. 
 80.Vocal Music— In the vowel sounds 
 of our language, are involved all the ele- 
 ments of music ; hence, every one who 
 wishes, can learn to sing. The third 
 sound of A in all, the second sound of 
 A in ar, the first sound of A in ale, the 
 fourth sound of A in at, the first sound 
 of in old, the second sound of in 
 ooze, the first' sound of I in isle, and 
 the first of E in eel, when naturally 
 sounded by a developed voice, will give 
 the correct intonations of the notes in 
 the Diatonic Scale, as follows, commenc- 
 ing at the bottom. 
 
 Eel, 8 
 Isle, 7 
 
 -0- 
 -0- 
 
 C-Note— 0-8-la— High. 
 Half tone 
 B-Note 
 
 Tone 
 
 Ooze ; 6 
 
 -0- 
 
 A-Note 
 
 Tone 
 
 Old, 5 
 
 ~°7 
 
 G-Note o-5-la-Medium 
 Tone 
 
 At, 4 
 Ale, 3 
 
 -0- 
 -0- 
 
 F-Note 
 
 Halftone 
 
 E-Note o-3-la-Medium 
 
 Tone 
 
 Ar, 2 
 
 -0- 
 
 D-Note 
 
 Tone 
 
 All, 1 
 
 -0- 
 
 C-Note — o-l -la— Low. 
 
 82. Elocution and Music, being insep- 
 arable in their nature, every step taken in 
 the former, advances one as many in the 
 latter ; and every one, of common organi- 
 zation, whether aware of it, or not, uses 
 all the elements of Music in his daily 
 intercourse with society^ When we call 
 to one at a distance, we raise the voice 
 to the upper pitches ; when to one near 
 by, we drop it to the lower pitches ; and 
 when at a medium distance, we raise it 
 to the middle pitches : that is, in the first 
 case, the voice is on, or about, the eighth, 
 note : in the second, on or about, the 
 first note : and in the last place, on, or 
 about the third or fifth note; in commen- 
 cing to read or speak in public, one 
 should never commence above his 
 fifth note, nor below his third note : and, 
 to ascertain on what particular pitch the 
 lowest natural note of the voice is, pro- 
 nounce the word awe, by prolonging it, 
 without feeling ; and to get the upptr 
 one, sound eel, strongly. 
 
 83. The Diatonic Scale, or, as usually 
 denominated, the eight notes, (though 
 there are but seven, the eighth being a 
 repetition of the first,) comprehends five 
 w r hole tones, and two semi, or half tones . 
 An erect ladder, with seven rounds in. 
 it, is a good representation of this scale: 
 it stands on the ground or floor, which 
 is the tonic, or first note ; the first round 
 is the second note or supertonic ; t he- 
 second round is the third note, or medi- 
 ant ; the third round, is the fourth note, 
 or subdominant ; between which and 
 the second round is a semitone ; the 
 fourth round is the fifth note, or domin- 
 ant ; the fifth round is the sixth note, 
 or submediant ; the sixth round is the 
 seventh note, or subtonic ; and the 
 seventh round is the eighth note or oc- 
 tave . 
 
 84. For the purpose of still farther de- 
 veloping and training the voice and ear, 
 for reading, speaking, and singing, a 
 systematic and thorough practice on the 
 twenty eight consonant sounds, is ab- 
 solutely essential : in which exercises 
 it is of the first importance to make the 
 effort properly and observe the exact 
 positions of the organs. These consonant 
 sounds are either single, double, or triple; 
 and some of them are vocal sounds; 
 others, merely aspirates, or bret 
 sounds : let them be analysed and dis- 
 
12 
 
 tingiyshed according to their natures, | 
 and uses. 
 
 85. B has but one sound. Ba, baa, | 
 fcall, bat ; be, beg • bide, bid ; bode, boon, I 
 boss ; bute, buss, brute ; boil, bound ; ba- ' 
 by, bar ber, bau bles, bab ble ; bea die, I 
 bed lam ; hi ble, bib ber j blab ed, cab- 1 
 in, blub ber, bar bar ism, bam boo zle, 
 ab bre vi ate, cab bage, dab ble, drub- 
 bing, gabble, gibber, gobble, hobnob, 
 hub bub, hob by, lub ber, na bob, peb- 
 ble, rab ble, rob ber, rub ber, tab by, 
 Ja cob, not Ja cop. 
 
 86. By obtaining correct ideas of the 
 sounds of our letters, and their influen- 
 ces over each other, the meaning and 
 pronunciation of words, and their power 
 over the understandings and wills of 
 men, when properly arranged into sen- 
 tences, teeming with thought and feel- 
 ing, with proper application and exer- 
 cise, I may become a good reader, speak- 
 er and writer. 
 
 8To C 4 — 1st. N. S. OR S, BEFORE E, I 
 
 and t : — Cede, cent, city, ci der, cy press 
 tree, 'celi ba cy, ci ta to ry, cit i zan- 
 ship, Cin cin na ti, ci vil i ty, a cerb, 
 bod ice, cen sus, a cid, cor nice, (not 
 cor nish,) de cen cy, eel lar, a ces cent, 
 def i cit, di la cer ate, di o ci san, (o 
 short) discipline, docile, (o short) en- 
 tice, fa cade, fas cin ate, im be cile, 
 par eel, pin cers, pla cid, pre ci pice, 
 pre cise, re cede, re ci pe, so ci e ty, sol- 
 jace, specify, spruce, trace, vice ge- 
 rency. 
 
 88. These arts, like all others, are 
 made up of many little things ; if I look 
 well to them, all difficulties will vanish, 
 or be easily overcome. Every youth 
 ought to blush at the thought of remain- 
 ing- ignorant of the first principles of his 
 native language. I can do almost any 
 thing, if I only think so, and try : there- 
 lore, let me not say I cant, but I will. 
 
 89.. Eegular and Irregular sounds 
 of C. — A ces cen cy, celer i ty, cic a- 
 trice, fas cin ate, prej u dice : clasp' d st 
 cyt i sus, dis place, cease less, ar tist's 
 skill, his sing, rise and prog ress, sea- 
 sick, cy press, des ig nate, cit ron, as- 
 ses' dst, per sists, wastes and des erts ; 
 as perse, he spits base brass and subsists 
 on stripes, and answers the sophist's 
 shrewd sug ges tions : sharp shrill 
 pounds sunk near his shanks . Percival's 
 Q-cts and extracts the ma gis trates sought 
 
 to prove ; he boasts he twists the texts 
 and suits the several sects : the strong 
 masts stood still in Stratsburg's finest 
 streets ; still strut ting, he persists the 
 ship is sunk ; sweetness sits smiling on 
 her lips. 
 
 90. S. — Swan swam over the sea, 
 well swum swan j swan swam back a- 
 gain, well swum swan. Sam Slick 
 sawed six sleek slim slippery saplings. 
 Amidst? the mists he thrusts his fists 
 against the posts and insists he sees the 
 ghosts. The steadfast strangers sang 
 sweetest sounds aside the purest lucid 
 streams, through false and adverse for- 
 ests straying : the son hates such stu- 
 dies ; for conscience's sake the battle 
 lasts still : the drunkard's face publish- 
 es his vice and disgrace. 
 
 Note.— In making this sound, be- 
 ware of letting the teeth remain too long 
 together ; for this is far from being a 
 pleasing sound, and the less there is of 
 it the better, after it is made : in- 
 deed, it may be given the best without 
 bringingthe upper and under teeth quite 
 together, and making the tip of the 
 tongue and upper teeth the most opera- 
 tive. C, is silent in the following : Czar, 
 arbuscle, victuals, Czarina, (i long e,) 
 muscle, indictable, and second c in Con- 
 necticut. 
 
 91. Lisping— is caused by permit- 
 ting the tongue to come against or be- 
 tween the front teeth, when it should 
 not ; thus substituting the breath sound 
 of th, for that of s or sh. This bad 
 habit may be overcome, by practising 
 the above, and similar combinations, 
 with the teeth closely and firmly set, 
 not allowing the tongue to press a- 
 gainst the teeth, nor making the effort 
 too near the front part of the mouth. — 
 The object to be attained is worthy of 
 great efforts : many can be taught to 
 do a thing in a proper manner, which 
 they would never find out of them- 
 selves. 
 
 92. Second, of K before A. 0. U. ch gh 
 k, 1, r, t, and generally at the end of 
 words and syllables. — Came, car, call, 
 cap; coach, coon, cot ; cute, cut, crude : 
 coil, cloud, claim, Clark, clause, cleave, 
 cleft ; clam, clime, cliff, close ; clod, 
 crape, craunch. crook, cure, crust,cruse; 
 cry, crypt, crowd, compact, ac rid, toc- 
 sin, ae claim, ac com mo date, ac cord, 
 
13 
 
 ftc count, bu col ic, di rect, e clip tic, 
 corrpct, lac tic, mi cro cosm, oc cult, 
 rac coon, spec ta cle, sue cumb, tac- 
 tics, vacant. 
 
 03. A perfect knowledge of these ele- 
 mentary and combined sounds, is essen- 
 tial to my becoming a good Elocution- 
 ist, and an excellent preparation for 
 studying any of the modern languages; 
 and I must master them, or I cannot 
 succeed in acquiring a distinct, appro- 
 priate, graceful and effective enuncia- 
 tion ; resolution, self-exertion and per- 
 severance are almost omnipotent ; I 
 will try them, and see. 
 
 94. Regular and irregular sounds of 
 C, ch, k, and q— Ca chex y, kail, each i- 
 na tions. cac a tech ny ; liq uor ; co- 
 quette ; char a<; ter, quake, clank, cat e- 
 chise, ar chi te.c ture, moc ca sin, flae* 
 cid, archives, facts, (not fax) sue cinct, 
 sac cha rine, choir, (quire) or ches ter, 
 ac quit, ask questions, (not ass ques- 
 tions) creak, (not screek) chyle, scep- 
 tic, chi me i i cal ; mosque, et i queue, 
 Munich, Tich i chus, schenck j a black 
 cake of curious quality, lough (lock, a 
 lake ; Irish) hough (hock) joint of a 
 hinder }eg of a beast. 
 
 95. Third sound of C is Z. — Dis cern, 
 ed.er,i,ble,ing,ment, sice, (the number 
 six in dice) sac ri flee, (not sacrifise, nor 
 sacrifis,) sac ri n* cer, sa cri fi cing, suf- 
 fice, (not sufhse) suffi ced. These are 
 about all the words in our language 
 where C sounds like Z. 
 90. These principles must be faithfully 
 studied and practiced, with a particular 
 reference to the expulsion of the vowel 
 sounds, and the prolongation of the 
 long ones, which exhibit quantity in 
 its elementary statue. I must exer- 
 cise my voice, and mind, in every use- 
 ful way, and labor to attain an inti- 
 mate knowledge of my vocal and men- 
 tal capacity; then 1 shall be able to see 
 any defects, and govern myself accord- 
 ingly. 
 
 9T. S has the same sound in many 
 wordM —Airs, nlms. awls, as, bees, bides, 
 bills, bones, booms, bogs, beds, buds ; 
 shams, cars, claws; Is lam ism, hus- 
 sar, is o late, Is ra el, na sal, pres i- 
 dent, res ig na tion, hys op, to grease, 
 greas y, be som, lose, to a buse, is, was, 
 u surp'd, res o nant, pre sume, reside, 
 tro sa ry> gris ly de serves, re sumes and 
 
 re signs his cause ; ours, (not ourn,} 
 ris en, (not riz.) bas soon. 
 98.Vowels are the mediums of convey- 
 ing the affections ; and Consonants of 
 the thoughts ; hence, all of them, that 
 are not silent, should be given fully anil 
 distinctly. The reason why the brute 
 creation cannot speak, is, because they 
 have no u^dersta^dixos, as men have^ 
 consequently, no thoughts, and of 
 course, no articulating organs : there- 
 fore, they merely sound their affections 
 instead of speaking them ; being guided 
 and influenced by instinct ; which is a 
 power necessary for their preservation 
 and continuance. 
 
 99. S, Z,and X.— Anx i e ty.giz zards, 
 beaux, beans and peas, miz zen, puz- 
 zler, Xerx es, (2d x like ks ) mez zo tin- 
 to, Xan thus, pri zes, muz zles, Xen o 
 phon, pis mire, dis a ble.as ter,band,dam, 
 ease,grace,guise, honor. like ; may, order, 
 own; every breeze breathes health; elves 
 on the shelves, by twelves, and daws 
 with claws; zion was zealous and a- 
 rose to the sacrifiej^he loves the tones 
 of music that hemys come up from 
 Nature's great temples. 
 
 100. The business of training youth 
 in Elocution, should begin in child- 
 hood, before the contraction of bad 
 habits, and while the character is in the 
 rapid process of formation. The firs: 
 school is the nuesery ; here, at least, 
 may be formed a clear and distinct ar- 
 ticulation, which is the first requisite? 
 for good reading and speaking ; nor 
 can ease and grace, in eloquence, be 
 separated from ease and grace in pri- 
 vate HJe, and in the social circle. 
 
 101. The Fourth sound of C is sh ; 
 alter the accent, and followed by ea, la 
 ie, <jo, eou and iou.— cean, so cial, 
 an cient, Pho ci on, sap o na ce ous, fe- 
 ro cious, te na cious, com mer cial, ju- 
 di cial, ca pa cious, pro fi cient, offi- 
 cious, su per fi cies, sus pi cious, ial la- 
 cious, ca pri cious, far i na ci ons. ar>- 
 preciate, dis social, ef fi cient, of fj- 
 cious, her ba cious, judi cious, pro viu- 
 cial, ra pa cious, Gre cian, spe cies, in- 
 *rra tiate, con sci en tious, ne go tiate, 
 Cap a do cia. 
 
 102. Elocution, relates to the propriety 
 of utterance, and is exhibited by a proper 
 enunciation, inflection and emphasis, 
 and signifies the manner of deli vei 
 
14 
 
 is divided into two parts, the correct, 
 which respects the meaning of what is 
 read or spoken ; that is, such a clear and 
 accurate pronunciation of the words, as 
 to be perfectly understood: and rhet- 
 orical, which supposes feeling ; whose 
 object is fully to convey and impress, the 
 entire sense, with all the variety, force 
 and beauty that taste and emotion de- 
 mand. " 
 
 103. S. T. Sh and ch, having ihe same \ 
 sound. — Mansion, cham paign, his cious, \ 
 su gar, ra tion al, chaise, is sue, mi nu- ! 
 ti a, chev a lier, nau se ate, pres sure, j 
 Mich i gan, cen sure, ex pa ti ate, Char- j 
 don, op tician, E gyptian, av a lanche, | 
 pro pi ti a tion, mar chio ness, Per sia, j 
 no vi ti ate ; char la tan, pro nun ci a tion, 
 Chi ca go, ra ti o. ci na tion, cha grin, 
 lis sure, gla ciers, tran sient, Che mung, 
 the shad sought and shunn'd the sun 
 shine; the bat, with short shrill shriek, 
 Hits by on leathern wings; shun sheep- 
 ish shame, nor wish to shine in transient 
 passion. 
 
 104, Good reafeg and speaking is 
 music ; and he who can sit unmoved by 
 its charms, is a stranger to correct taste, 
 and lost in insensibility. A single ex- 
 hibition of natural eloquence, may kin- 
 dle a love of the art, in the bosom of an 
 aspiring youth, which, in after life, will 
 impel and animate him through a long 
 career of usefulness. Self made men 
 are the'glory of the world. 
 
 1051 I).has2. 1st N. S : Dane, dart, 
 dawn, dab ; deed, dead ; die, did ; doe, 
 do, dog ; duke, duck, dm id ; doit, doubt, 
 dis dain, dan dy ; deb it ed, di a dem, 
 did die, dooms day, dog ged; dud geon. 
 Dm id ; down ward, ad diet, badge, dad- 
 dy, /de frarrded, do dec a gon, ed dy, 
 flood ed, head ed, heart ed, in deed, dab- 
 bl'd, Pad dy, sad die, un aid ed, ad join, 
 ad denfdum, buzz'd, dubb'd, had dock, 
 kin die* la dy bird, mid day, nod ding, 
 pre r de ter min'd, quad ra ted, rid die, 
 second hand ed, ted ded, underbid ded, 
 ven ded, wind bound, the sad den'd 
 ^dreamer'sjearJ 
 
 108. 1 must give the consonant sounds, 
 particularly /the final ones, with great 
 care and neverrun the words together, 
 making one,' out of three. And, is pro- 
 nounced six different ways • only one of 
 which is right. Some call it an, or en ; 
 others, un, nrf, or »' ; and a few and : 
 
 thus; good an bad; caus en effect, 
 hills an groves ; you nd I, or youn 1 ; 
 an de said ; pleas ure un pain ; to un- 
 the ; voice n ear ; bread en butter ; vi r- 
 tun vice ; Jame zen John ; solem un sub 
 lime. I will avoid such glaring faults, 
 and give to each letter its appropriate 
 sound ; David's hand did it. 
 
 10T. Inasmuch as practicing on the 
 gutterals very much improves the voice, 
 by giving it depth of tone, and impart- 
 ing to it smoothness and strength, 1 will 
 repeat the following with force and en- 
 ergy, and at the same time convert all 
 the breath into sound: Discard ed, dis- 
 in ter est ed, strand ed, bobb'd, bands, 
 (not bans,) ebb'd and flow'd; sounds, 
 (not souns,) hands, (not bans,) growl' d, 
 double dy'd, fields,(not feels,) day dawn, 
 friends, (not frens,) err'd and stray- d a 
 good deal, (not er dund stray' d a good 
 eel :) worlds, (not worls) rublrd, blabb'd , 
 purr'd, digg'd, roll'd, bragg'd, lord, 
 whizz'd, strolPd, dread ed, con demn'd, 
 brib'd, card ed, up braided, shields, (not 
 sheels,) thou sands, (not thou zens.) 
 
 108. Do not hurry your enunciation 
 of words, precipitating syllable over 
 syllable, and word over word; nor melt 
 them together into a mass of confusion, 
 in pronouncing them ; do not abridge, 
 nor prolong them too much, nor swallow, 
 nor force them ; but deliver them from 
 your vocal and articulating organs, as 
 golden coins are from the mint, accu- 
 rately impressed, perfectly finished, 
 neatly and elegantly struck, distinct, in. 
 due succession, and of full weight. * 
 
 109. 2d of T, when at the end of words 
 and immediately preceded by c, /, k, 
 p, q.s,:c, sh, and ch, with silent e, and un- 
 der the accent ; grace'd, stuff'd, crackxl, 
 tipp'd, piqu'd, mark'd, tax'd, crush'd, 
 fllch'd, black'd, es cape'd, a bash'd, 
 flinch'd, spie'd, ruff'd, sack'd, jump'd, 
 push'd a massed quench ; d,plac'd,blink'd,, 
 pip'd, curs'd, attached, guess'd, talk'd, 
 fix'd, watch'd, spie'd, tripp'd, scrap'd, 
 dripp'd, arch'd, quack'd, un blench' d, 
 scratch'd, swapp'd, e clips'd, dash'd,. 
 chaf'd, poach'd, af fiane'd. 
 
 1 10. To read and speak with ease, 
 accuracy, and effect, are great accom- 
 plishments; as elegant and dignified, as 
 they are useful, and important ; many 
 covet the art, but few are willing to 
 make the necessary application; and 
 
15 
 
 this makes good readers and speakers, 
 so very rare. Success depends, princi- 
 pally, on the student's owe exertions, 
 uniting correct theory with faithful prac- 
 tice. 
 
 111. D and T havivg the same sound. 
 — A wak'd, ab stracts, tres pass'd, a 
 tell tale tattling termagant whipped the 
 town ; talk'd, stamp'd, chaf d, shock'd, 
 tottering towers; twists the fritters; 
 out casts ; pre texts ; tern pests, cor- 
 rect ly, (not correcly,) hosts, tac tics, 
 pet u lent, sit u ate, part ner, [not pard- 
 ner.] sa ti e ty, past ure, tints, soft ly, 
 (not sofly,) tat ter, tastes, sat down, 
 (not sad own.) tracts, (not trax,) guests, 
 best tart, last night, at tracts, a dopts, 
 
 "great deal, (not a gray deal.) struct ure, 
 iiat ure, fort une, past ure ; when the 
 steed is stolen, he shuts the stable door. 
 Stat ue, cov et ous j the gravity of your 
 rotundity has knoek'd me into nonentity. 
 
 112. "When a twister, a twisting will 
 twist him a twist, For twisting his twist, 
 he three twines doth kit wist ; But if one 
 of the twines of the twist do ?mtwist, 
 The twine that untwisteth untwisteth 
 the twist. 
 
 113. F has two: 1st N. S: Safe, 
 scarf, chaff, cleft, fife, loaf, cof fer, staff, 
 rife, if, brief, a loof, off, calf s head, (not 
 calve's head.) sheaf, left, wife's father, 
 (not wives father,) frightful, proffer, 
 fear ful, fret ful, buffoon, stiff, woof, 
 for, ful fil. faith ful, fruit ful. af fa ble, 
 buf fet, cuf fy, daf fo dil, ef feet, gaffer, 
 of fence, prof fer, suffer, cof fin, suf fix, 
 four fold. 
 
 114. F. Gh and Ph, having the same 
 sound. — Brough, chough, (a sea bird,) 
 sphere, lith o graph, hough, nymph; 
 dan druff. (not dander.) laugh, cough, 
 trough, e nough, draught, hie cough, (not 
 hickcupj phys ic, proph et, go pher, 
 phan torn, rough, phlegm, eph a, her- 
 maph ro dite, (not niorphodite,) slough, 
 the fro ward is fierce as fire ; naph tha. 
 sap phire, (saf fir) — Sap phi ra, — (1st 
 p silent in both these words) eph a- 
 tha, e phem e ral, hand kerchief, (not 
 han kercher.) The philosophers laugh'd 
 at the phantoms of fancy's fitful fears, 
 while the self fiatterd sylph is engulph'd 
 in the wolf's dreary cave. 
 
 1 15. English Pronunciation. — The 
 difficulty of applying rules, to the pro- 
 nunciation of our language, may be 
 
 illustrated by the two following line<, 
 where ough is pronounced in several 
 different ways ; as o, uff, off, wp; ow, 
 oo, and ock. Though the tough cough 
 and hiccough plough me through, o'ei 
 life's dark loii2;h my course I will pur- 
 sue.. Birds of a feather flock together. 
 Fast bind, fast find. He filled the draught 
 and freely quaff'd and puffed the frag- 
 rant fume and laugh'd. 
 
 1 16. 2d of V : of, (never off. nor uv : ) 
 here of, there of, where of; the only 
 words where f has this sound: a piece of 
 cake, (not a piece o cake, nor a piece ur 
 cake.) V — vain, var nish, vault, val id, 
 veal, ves tal, vile, viv id. vogue, void, 
 vow, brave, chev alier. de vise, fe vet, 
 greaves ; re move, shiv er, trav erse. 
 ve nus ; (the god ess of love, a planet ;) 
 vi va city, wives, be haves, de serves, 
 thieves, gyves, livers, vivi fy, swerves, 
 vi va voce, (by the living voice :) be- 
 lieves, delves, con ser va tive ; vine 
 clad vales vocal with vintage songs. I 
 like white wine vinegar with veal very 
 well this very warm dav. 
 
 1 IT* MuscleBreakers^-Thou waft'd's* 
 the rickety skiff over the mountai 1 '. 
 height cliff's, and clearly saw'st the full 
 orb'd moon, in whose silvery and efful- 
 gent light, thou reef 'd'st the haggled 
 sails of the ship wrecked vessel, on the 
 rock bound coast of Apiiachiola. He 
 was an unamiable, disrespectful, in- 
 communicative, disingenuous, formida- 
 ble, unmanageable, supercillious, and 
 pusilanimous old bachelor. Get the 
 latest amended edition of Charles Smith's 
 Thucydides. 
 
 113. Ph sounds like v— in Stephn, 
 (not Stevun,) neph ew, (not neffu;' 
 which two words are probably the only 
 ones in our language, where ph ha^ 
 this sound. Give me, (not gim me.) 
 have not (not haint, nor hav'nt.) don't 
 love to go (not luff to go,) rather, do not 
 &c.) you will have to go, (not you'll 
 haf to go.) vive le roi, (veeve le rwah,) 
 wine, venison and vinegar, are very 
 good victuals in a vessel in a warm 
 day. 
 
 119. G nA^ THREE SOUNDS: 1st. N. 
 
 S. or J. before e, ?', and y. generally, 
 gem. gibe, iz"i 1 1 , geri dor, gen ins, gi an;, 
 gin seng, (not ging shang.) gen e al c>- 
 gist, Geor gi um Stilus ; ger mina tion, 
 gym nas tic, gyp sy, ex ag ge rate, ch 
 
16 
 
 rig i nal, gym na si n m , sug gest, (not 
 -sugg jest, as in the Dictionaries,) hy- 
 dro gen. re frig er ate, gen ger bread for 
 the fragile General of G hent ; ag i tate, 
 bur gess, char ger, de gen er ate, ener- 
 gy, fo li age, ,geor gic, grange, log i cal, 
 mag ic, pan e gyr ic, ser geant. 
 
 120. He who attempts to make an 
 inroad on the existing state of things, 
 though evidently for the better, will find 
 many to encourage him, and assist in 
 effecting. a useful reform; and a few 
 who will treat his honest exertions with 
 resentment and contempt, and embrace 
 their old errors with a fonder pertinacity, 
 the more vigorous the effort to tear them 
 from their arms. There is more hope 
 of a fool , than of one wise in tlis own 
 conceit. 
 
 121. G AND^J HAVING THE SAME SOUND 
 
 — Gen tie men* ju di cicus, judges, tan- 
 gent, uk generous, jejune, vengeance, 
 gen tie, im age, wa ger, just ly, an gel ic, 
 le gions, Ju ba James and Jul ia John- 
 son, jeal ous of joy, werecq ju gi al ly 
 join'd, in June or July, at Justice' Jen- 
 nings' ju re di vi no, (by divine right) 
 of jus gen ti urn : (the law of nations,) 
 Ja son, Ju ve nal, and Ger man i cus 
 were justly judged by jealous Juno and 
 Jupi ter. 
 
 122. In all schools, one leading ob- 
 ject should be to teach the science and 
 art of reading and speaking with effect ; 
 they ought indeed, to occupy seven-fold 
 more time. Teachers should strive to 
 improve themselves as well as their pu- 
 pils, and feel, that to them are commit- 
 ted the future orators of our country. 
 A first rate reader is of infinitely more 
 importance than a first rate performer 
 
 * on a piano, or any other artificial instru- 
 ment. Nor is the voice of song sweeter 
 than the voice of eloquence ; and there 
 may be eloquent readers, as well as elo- 
 quent speakers. 
 
 123. The sound of G is hard or gut- 
 teral, before a, o, u, I, r, and often be- 
 fore e, and i ; also, at the end of words 
 and often syllables. — Game, garb, gall, 
 gap, geese, get, guile, gift ; gore, goose, 
 gone, glume, gull, gru el, goi ter; growl, 
 glair, glass, glebe glide, gliff ; globe, 
 gloom, gloss, glut, glout, grave grasp, 
 green, grime, grim, grope, groove, grot : 
 grouse • rag ged, pig gin, gog gles, slug- 
 gish, ag gra vate, ag grieve, bog gy; egg, 
 
 fog gy, beg gar, flag gy, gan grpiic, hig- 
 gle dy pig gle dy. 
 
 124. Foreigners and natives may de- 
 rive essential aid from this system of 
 vocal Philosophy, enabling them to read 
 and speak the language correctly ; which 
 they most certainly ought to do, before 
 they are employed to teach in our schools: 
 for whatever children learn, they should 
 learn correctly. Good teachers are quite 
 as necessary in the 'primary school, as in 
 the Academy or College: at least, so 
 thought Philip, King of Macedon, when 
 he sent his son Alexander to Aristotle, 
 the great philosopher, to learn his letters: 
 and Alexander says he owed more to 
 his teacher than to his father. 
 
 125.G &Gh similar in sound. -Magnet ; 
 burgher, gory, a ghast, gherkin, quag- 
 gy, phys i og no my~segre gate, ghost- 
 ly, ir refra gable, ni ger, jag gy, quag- 
 mire : Scrog gins, of Brob dig nag, got 
 a big gig, and gave a gold guin ea ; go- 
 ry, glade ; dig or beg, the game is gone; 
 a giddy giggling girl, her kins folk 
 plague by her vul gar mean ness and her 
 con verse vague. 
 
 1 26. Elocution is not, as some errone- 
 ously suppose, an art of some thing ar- 
 tificial in tones, looks and gestures, that 
 may be learned by imitation. The prin- 
 ciples teach us to exhibit truth and nature 
 dressed to advantage : its objects are to 
 ejiable the reader and speaker to mani- 
 fest his thoughts and feelings in the most 
 pleasing, perspicuous and forcible man- 
 ner, so as to charm the affections, en- 
 lighten the understanding, and leave 
 the deepest, and most permanent im- 
 pression, on the mind of the attentive 
 hearer. 
 
 127. The third sound of G is Zh.— 
 This sound of g however, though com- 
 mon to s and z, is derived from the 
 French ; or rather, they are French 
 words not yet Anglicised, or made into 
 English. Rogue (roozh, red paint for 
 the face,) me nag e rie, (a collection of 
 animals, or a place for them,) pro te gc 
 (prota zha,' a person protected or pat- 
 ronized ; ) bad e nage, (light or playful 
 discourse,) mirage,"( an optical illusion, 
 presenting an image of water in sandy 
 deserts,) Char ge d' affairs, (shar zha- 
 daf fare, an ambassador, or public rain-* 
 ister, of secondary rank.) 
 
 128. These principles of oratory, are 
 
17 
 
 veil calculated to accustom the mind to 
 ehe closest investigation and reasoning ; 
 thus affording a better discipline for the 
 scientific, rational, affectuous faculties 
 of the mincf, than even the study of the 
 Mathematics : for the whole man is 
 here addressed, and all his mental pow- 
 ers, and all his acquirements, are called 
 into requisition. This system is a fiery 
 ordeal, and those who pass through it, 
 under standingly and p r act ic all y-, will come 
 out purified as by fire. 
 
 129, S AND Z HAVING THE SAME 
 
 sound. — A si a, ad he sion, a zure, cas- 
 u al, de ri sion, en clo sure, ef fid sion, 
 meas ure, in ci sion, ob tru sion, o sier, 
 pro fu sion, treas ure. u su ry, vis ion ; 
 a bra sion, cro sier, e lis ion, ho sier. in- 
 va sion, am brosial, co he sion, e rasure, 
 de ci sion, sei sure, enthusiasm, cor- 
 ro sion, ro se ate. treas ure, viz ier, (the 
 prime minister of the Turkish empire,) 
 Lys ia, ec cle si as tic,, mag ne si a. 
 
 130* This work tells the ptrpil, as the 
 master workman does the apprentice ; this 
 is the principle, or rule, and this is the 
 way to qpply it ; and when the rule is 
 thus applied to practice he has no more 
 use for it : indeed, its rules and direc- 
 tions serve him the same purpose as the 
 guide post does the travelhr ; who. alter 
 visiting the place toward which it di- 
 rects, has no further use for it. 
 
 131. H has but one sound, which is 
 merely an aspirate, or forcible breathing, 
 made in the glottis. — Hale, hard, hall, 
 ham ; he, hem ; hie, him ; hold, hoop, 
 hot; hue, hum j hoist, hound: hairy, 
 har bor, hadser, hammer, heedless, hel- 
 met, high er. hind er, holy, whose, how- 
 ev er, be hind hand, hu man • his ex- 
 hausted highness exhibited his horrible 
 shrunk shank, and hopping, hied him- 
 self home, happy to have his hands, his 
 head, and his heart whole. 
 
 132. Be very particular in pronounc- 
 ing the jaw or voice breakers, and cease 
 not, till you can give every sound fully, 
 correctly and distinctly. If your vocal 
 powers are well exercised by faithful 
 practice on the more difficult combina- 
 tions, they will acquire a facility of move- 
 ment, and a precision of action, a flexi- 
 bility, grace and force truly surprising. 
 
 133. H.— Ad here, be best, co here, 
 <\e hort, ex hale, har vest, haw thorn, 
 fcal loo, hea then, her schel, hil lock, 
 
 2 
 
 home ly, hov el, hu mid, hum drum) 
 huz za, hy men, hyp o crite, hoi ty toi* 
 ty, hoist ing, inhab it, mohair, pro hib- 
 it, re hearse, exhaust, unheard, exhib- 
 it, up hold, be hind, ex hort, vehe ment- 
 ly : hum ble bee, hearts horn, shroud, 
 hot house, an ni hi la tion ; he went 
 with him, (not with im,) w r ith all his 
 heart, (not is heart,) how high his holi- 
 ness holds his hoary head. 
 
 134. Alliteration — is a repetition 
 of the same letter, or letters, at certain 
 intervals ; a. decoration used chiefly in 
 poetry, tho' sometimes found in prose. 
 With many a weary step, and many a 
 groan, Up the high hill he heaves a huge 
 round stone. Be honest and humane, 
 and hate not even thy enemies. Had 
 my sweet Harry had but half their num- 
 bers, this day might I, hanging on Hot- 
 sper's neck, have talked. 
 
 135. H IS SILENT IN THE FOLLOWING 
 
 words. — A ghast. ca tarrA, disft a bille, 
 heiress, herb age, honest, shepherd, 
 hon or, humor, hum ble, rhi noc e ros, 
 rheum, rheto ric. rheubarb, rhine, rhap- 
 so dy, rhyme, Thorn as, thyme- : also ' 
 when preceded by a vowel in the same 
 syllable : as, A bi jah, Be ri ah, Ca lah. 
 Di nah, E li jah, Ge rah, Hul dah, I sa* 
 iah, Jo nah. Kanah. Lib nah, Mes si ah, 
 Nin e vah, O ba di ah, Pis gah, Ru mab, 
 Sa lah, Te rah, U ri ah, Va ni ah, Ze- 
 lah. 
 
 136. Important remarks. — Every' 
 pupil should be required to notice, dis- 
 tinctly, not only all the specific sounds 
 of our language, simple and compound, 
 but also the different and exact posi- 
 tions of the vocal organs, necessary to 
 produce them. The teacher should un- 
 yieldingly insist, upon having these two 
 things faithfully attended to: for sue- 
 cess in elocution and music, absolutely 
 demands it : no one, therefore, should 
 wish to be excused from a lull and hear- 
 ty compliance. Master these elemen- 
 tary principles, and you will have com- 
 mand of all the in odiums for communi- 
 cating your thoughts and feelings. 
 
 137. It is said that no description ran ' 
 adequately represent Lord Chatham ; 
 to comprehend the force of ins elo- 
 quence, it was necessary to set and 
 hearh\m ; his whole delivery was such 
 as to make the orator a part of his ou*i 
 eloquence : his mind was view' J in km 
 
18 
 
 countenance, and so embodied was it 
 in his every look and gesture, that his 
 words were- rather felt than Jo/lowed ; 
 they invested his hearers ; the weapons 
 of his opponents fell from their hands ; 
 he spoke with the ,air and vehemence 
 of inspiration, and the very atmosphere 
 flamed around him. 
 
 138. L has one sound. — Lace, lard, 
 laud, lamb, lee, led; lie, lid ; load, loose, 
 lot; luce, lug; Loyd. lounge; label, 
 large ly, law ful, le gal, lev eJ, li be!, 
 lil y, lo cal, loop hole, love ly, lul la by, 
 loud ly, al ka li, bliss ful, dal li ance, fa- 
 tally, gen teelly, hal lu ci nate. il log- 
 3 cal, mal le a ble, nul li ty, ol i gar. 
 chy, pel li cle, re pel lent, sa li val, tit- 
 it late, un like ly, vel lum, wil ful ly. 
 His long limbs in listless languor lie. 
 
 139. Pronounce my, you, your, that, 
 when emphatic, with the vowels full 
 and open. My harp is as good as 
 yours. Heto!d7/cw, but would not tell 
 vie. I said he was ray friend, not yours. 
 That man related that story. When 
 these words are not emphatic, the 
 sounds of y and u are shortened, the o 
 being silent, and u having its 2d sound, 
 and the a entirely suppressed. My pen 
 is as bad as my paptr. How do you 
 do ? Very well, how do you do ? Have 
 you got your book? This is not your 
 book, it is my book. I said that you 
 said,|that you told him so. 
 
 140. L.— La die, ful fil, live ly, live- 
 long, health ful gale o'er hill and da ! e ; 
 the male stole a pail full of stale meal ; 
 the volatile tailor regaled himself over 
 the elder blow tea (not loot ;) the lonely 
 quail bewailed the hail as he trailed the 
 rail ; the tall jailor failed to hold the 
 bail, who scaled the wall, and prevail- 
 ed over all. A lean, long, lively, lull- 
 ing lynx, was lately lolling by a lonely 
 little lake, located on the loyal lea. 
 
 141. That is th' man th't said th't 
 you saw him. I say th't that th't that 
 man said, is not that th't that man told 
 him. That th't I say is this : th't that, 
 th'l that gentleman advanced, is not 
 rhap th't he should have spoken ,• for he 
 said -th't that that th't that man point- 
 
 •1 out, is. not that that, th't that lady 
 insisted th't it was, but is another that. 
 
 142. M has one sound. — Maim, mar, 
 mall, man., ; meek, men ; mine, mint; 
 jii'j.c, .Hivuiij moss : mule, mum, my, 
 
 moist, mound : malt, man, mam mon, 
 me di um, mem o ran dum, mur mur- 
 ing, mim ic, mo ment, moon beams, 
 mon u ment, mutiny, mum my, moist- 
 ness; lame charms almost all mankind. 
 A mal ga male, brim mer, cir cum am- 
 bu late, dum my, em blem, per ma- 
 nent, gammon, ham mock, im me mo- 
 ri al, jum ble, mam mi form, me mis- 
 matics, om ni um gath er um, pre mi- 
 um, Ro man ism. 
 
 143. Read and speak in such a just 
 and impressive manner, as will in- 
 struct, interest and affect your hearers, 
 and reproduce in then] alt those ideas 
 and emotions, which you wish to con- 
 vey. Remember that theory is one 
 thing and practice ^another ; and that 
 there is a great dirlerence between 
 knowing how a sentence should be read 
 or spoken, and the ability to read or 
 speak it ; theory is the result of tho't, 
 practice of actual experience. . 
 
 144. M. — Am mo ni um, cim me- 
 rian, da turn, di lem ma, er ra turn, min- 
 i mum and max i mum, mem mo ran- 
 dum, mi as ma, scramble, gum my, 
 mo men turn, som nam bu lism, en co- 
 mi um, an i mal cu lum, ar ca num., 
 mid ship man, mis be comes, stra turn, 
 trim mer, um brage, vam pire, wam- 
 pum ; mind, manners, magnanimity 
 and mercy make a mighty man. The 
 smooth stream in smoother numbers 
 flows. M is silent, in AZnason and 
 mnemonics. 
 
 145. Ctcero and Demosthenes, by 
 their words, lives, maxims and pracfice, 
 show the high estimation in which they 
 held the subject of oratory ; for they de- 
 voted years to the study and practice of 
 its theory and art, under the most cele- 
 brated masters of antiquity. Most of 
 the effects of ancient, as well as modern 
 eloquence, may be attributed to the man- 
 ner of delivery ; we read their words, 
 but their spirit is gone ; the body remains 
 beautiful indeed, but motionless and 
 dead; true eloquence revivifies it. 
 
 146. N has two sounds, 1st. Name 
 sound. Nail, nard, naught, nap, need, 
 net, nice, nip, no, noon, not, nude, nun, 
 noise, noun ; naked, nar cot ic, nau ti- 
 cal, nan ny, neg li gent, nine pins, nin- 
 ny, no ble man, noon tide, non sense, 
 nun ne ry, nine ty nine. An ti no mi an , 
 be nig nant ; con tarn i nate, du en na, 
 
19 
 
 en chant ment, Flan i gan, hunts man, 
 in nu en do, joint ten ant, land's man, 
 man i kin, Pan the on. Mine alone be 
 the winning tone. 
 
 14T. Distinctness of articulation de- 
 mands special attention, and requires 
 that you should pronounce the vocal 
 letters, as well as every word, audibly 
 and correctly, giving to each its appro- 
 priate force and quantity. Unless these i 
 principles are perfectly understood, your : 
 future acquirements will be more or less ! 
 faulty : for, in proportion as one is ig- 
 norant of what ought to be felt, thought, j 
 and done, will he be liable to err. 
 
 148. N. — Con di ments, u nan i- 1 
 mous, con ver sant, en chained, con so- 1 
 nant, con ven tion, om nip o teat, so cm- j 
 i an, tan ta mount, coiiii ter pane, un an- 1 
 swer a ble, con tent ment, ven i son, I 
 wan ton ness ; in vain the country swain ' 
 drains the plains. He knows his nose ; | 
 I know he knows his nose : he said I ! 
 knew he knows his nose : and if he says ! 
 he knows I know he knows his nose, of : 
 course, he knows I know he knows his j 
 nose. 
 
 149, Some public speakers, in other \ 
 respects inferior, from the ease, grace, j 
 dignify and power of their delivery, are 
 followed and applauded ; while others, | 
 however sound in matter, and finished j 
 in language, on account of their defi- j 
 ciency of manner, are passed by all most j 
 unnoticed. All experience teaches us ; 
 the great importance of manner, as a . 
 means of inculcating truth, and persuad- j 
 ing others to embrace it. Lord Bacon j 
 says, it is as necessary for a public j 
 speaker, as decorum for a gentleman, j 
 
 150, The 2d sound of N is ng. — | 
 Before the k sound of c generally, and 
 always before hard g; before k and q, 
 under the accent. Link, Con gress, 
 bank, cinque, concourse, a^ guish, con- 
 quer, fin ger. strength, an gu larjon ger, 
 ink, stran gling, youn ger, an chor, 
 bun gle, con quest, don key, gin gle, 
 bun ger, in got, jun gle, Ian guid, man- 
 gle, plank, punc til io, ran cor ous, sanc- 
 ti ty, tin kle, un cle, wrinkle. The 
 sounds of M and iVare nasal, and the 
 only ones of the language. 
 
 151. Be perfectly distinct in your ar- 
 ticulation, or you cannot become an ea- 
 sy, graceful, effective and natural Elo- 
 cutionist ; therefore; practice on the 
 
 vowels and consonants as here recom- 
 mended, separately and combined. If 
 your utterance is rapid and indistinct, 
 your reading and speaking will not be 
 listened to with much pleasure or profit. 
 A hint to those who would be wise, is 
 sufficient. 
 
 152. JV— Nz— An-gle, cank-er; ex- 
 tinct, dan-gle, junc-tion, lin-guist, min- 
 gle, sanc-tion, shrink, spangle, syn-co- 
 pe, trin-ket, lon-gest, tank-ard, con-go, 
 swin-gle, lin-go, anx-i-e-ty, dank, plun- 
 ket, sin-gle, thank-less, twin-kle, lank, 
 ta-king, san-guine, youn-gest, jun-gling, 
 the tinkling bell ; he says he is longing 
 anxiously for the long song, they sung 
 at the singing meeting. 
 
 153. The common mode of teaching 
 Elocution is considered the true one, be- 
 cause it has been so long believed and 
 practiced; the old have become famil- 
 iar with it, and follow it -from habit, as 
 their predecessors did, and the rising 
 generation receive -it on trust ; thus they 
 pass on striving to keep each other in 
 countenance : hence it is, that most of 
 our bad habits, in this important art, 
 are born in the primary school, brought 
 up in the Academy, and graduated in 
 the College ; if we proceed so far in our 
 education. Is not an entire revolution 
 necessary ? 
 
 15 4. P has one sound. Paid, par, 
 pall, pap ; peep, pet ; pipe, pip ; pope, 
 pool, pop; pule, pup, puss ; point, pound; 
 pi-per, pa-pa, pap-py, pro-pin -qui-ty, 
 pine-apple pies and pepper pods ; peer- 
 less, pr-per, pip-pin, pop-py, pup-py, ap- 
 pend, bap-tism, cop-per, fop-pe-ry, hip- 
 po-pot-a-mus, lip-pi-tude, map-pe-ry, 
 rip-pin^:, pap-poose, wrap-per, slop-shop, 
 tap-i-o-ca, whap-per. A Paddy pick'd 
 a peck of pickl'd peppers and put them 
 on a broad brim'd pewter platter. 
 
 155. In ancient Rome, an orator's 
 education began in infancy ; so should 
 it be now : the seeds of eloquence may 
 be sown when the child is on the ma- 
 ternal bosom ; the voice should be de- 
 veloped with the mind. If the child has 
 good examples set him. in reading and 
 speaking, and the youth is attentive to 
 his every day language, and is careful to 
 improve his mind and voice together, he 
 will become a good elocutionist, without 
 scarcely knowing it. Connection and 
 a*>o.:iation, have as much u» do with out 
 
20 
 
 manner of speaking, as with our cast of 
 thinking. 
 
 156. P.— Ap-pal, cup-board, (not 
 cub-burd,) depths, ep-o-pee, frip-pe-ry. 
 op-press, por-poise, rip-per, slop-py, tip- 
 ple, ap-peal, clap-board, cop-per, flop- 
 ping, hap-py, op-po-nent, pre-pare, sap- 
 py, strip-pling, tip-top, ap-plaud, ap- 
 prize, pu-pil, pro-pound, ap-point, ap- 
 prove, hopes and pains, pop-u-lar, pa- 
 pa-cy, pick-pock-et : paupers are poor 
 people supported by a tax on the public. 
 Pigmies are pigmies still though perch'd 
 on pyramids. 
 
 157. Muscle Breakers. Peter 
 Prickle Prandle picked three pecks of 
 prickly pears from three prickly prang- 
 ly pear trees: if then, Peter Prickle Pran- 
 dle, picked three pecks of prickly pears 
 from three prickly prangiy pear trees j 
 where are the three pecks of prickly 
 pears that Peter Prickle Prandle picked 
 from three prickly prangiy pear trees? 
 Success to the successful prickly prang- 
 iy pear picker. 
 
 158. R has two sounds, 1st. Name 
 sound, or smooth, after a vowel sound. 
 Air, burrs, cars, dire, ears, force, ire, 
 jars, lore, oars, quires, roars, stars, tears, 
 wars, ar-bor, bar-bers, corn-ners, dor- 
 mer, er-rors, fer-vor, gar-blers, hard- 
 ware, pur-ports, quar-ters, search-er, tor- 
 por, verd-ure, ar-bi-ters, fore-fa -.thers, 
 lar-ders, mur-der-ers, nor-then-ers / sor- 
 cer-ers, Tar-tars, va-por, war- fare, hor- 
 id. Charles, go to the barn and get 
 some corn and feed the horses : to give 
 this sound of r, turn the tip of the tongue 
 to the roof of the mouth. 
 
 159. Written Language consists of 
 letters, and consequently, is more dura- 
 ble than spoken language, which is com- 
 posed of articulate sounds. Our written 
 alphabet contains twenty-six letters, 
 which make syllables and words; words 
 make sentences ; sentences paragraphs, 
 which make sections and chapters ; 
 these constitute an essay, discourse, ad- 
 dress, oration, poem, dissertation, tract 
 or book : but our vocal alphabet has for- 
 ty-four letters, or sounds, which make 
 up the whole of spoken language. 
 
 160. The second sound of R, is 
 burr'd, rough, or trill'd, whenever it oc- 
 curs before vowel sounds in the same 
 syllable : Rail Roads, rips, runs, ru-ral; 
 ran-ccr, rar-i-ty ; rook, rep-re-sent j ri- 
 
 ot-ous, rib-ald-ry, roar-ing, rig-or-ous, 
 ribb'd, rqil-e-ry, ran-co-ms, rap-pa-ree, 
 re-pairs/* re-frig-e-rate, re-tire, throne, 
 re-mu-ne-ra-tion, rep-ro-bate, rct-ro- 
 gade, re-ver-be-ra-tion. The rocks are 
 riven, and rifted oaks rush along the 
 rivers : rough winter rudely rends the 
 robes of autumn, and rattling thunder, 
 roaring, rolls the rafts around the rocky 
 regions. 
 
 161. Dr. Franklin says, (of the just- 
 ly celebrated Whitfield,) that it would 
 have been fortunate for his reputation, 
 if he had left no written works behind 
 him ; his talents would then have been 
 estimated by their effects : indeed his 
 elocution was almost faultless. But 
 whence did he derive his effective man- 
 ner ? We are informed that he took 
 lessons of Garrick, an eminent tragedian 
 of England, who was a great master in 
 Nature's school of teaching and practis- 
 ing this useful art. 
 
 162. The trilled sound of R. Crock- 
 e-ry, ef-fron-te-ry, grid-i-ron, ir-re- 
 proach-a-ble, ju-ris-pru-dence, li-bra-ri- 
 an, op-pro-bri-ous, pre-ca-ri-ous, ree-re- 
 ant, trans-cript, un-re-prieved, necessa- 
 ry result, broken ribs, a hundred prime 
 citrons ; re-treat, romantic dreams ; 
 praying children ; resurrection throng : 
 ruin seize thee, ruthless King : a Prus- 
 sian bear approached the strong rhinoc- 
 eros ; a rat in a rat trap, ran through 
 the rain on a x rail, with a raw lump of 
 red liver in his mouth : the rough rock 
 roars : round and round the rugged 
 rocks the ragged rascal runs, 
 
 163. Many persons take great pains 
 in their drtss, to appear well, and receive 
 attention ; and so far as personal ap- 
 pearance can exert an inf!uence ; they 
 attain their end : but if they would cul- 
 tivate their language, and the proper 
 way of using it, so as not to deform 
 themselves in reading and conversation, 
 they might accomplish the object at 
 which they aim. ' 
 
 154. W HAS ONE CONSONANT SOUND, 
 
 and one vowel sound ; it is heard in 
 woo, which should be its name ; as it is 
 in the Welch language : Wail, waft, 
 waltz, wag, weak, well ; wild-fire, wig- 
 wam ; wo-ful, woof, want, work, wood, 
 wound, (did wind,) waiter, wed-ding, 
 wise-ly, wish-ful, wove, dwarf, tweak, 
 i swoop, walls, weeps, weath-er, will, wa- 
 
21 
 
 ter, wood, worm-wood, wo-be-gone ; a- 
 wake, be-wail, in- ward, re-ward, waive, 
 al-ways, wea-ry, wedge, wick-ed. The 
 waves wandered with the wild and wan- 
 ton winds, that wail and weep. 
 
 165. Written Language is used for 
 communicating information of persons 
 distant from each other, and for trans- 
 mitting, to succeeding ages, knowledge 
 that might otherwise be lost, or hand- 
 ed down by erring tradition. Spoken 
 language is used to convey the thoughts 
 and feelings of those who are present, 
 and are speaking, or conversing togeth- 
 er : the former is of course addressed 
 to our eyes, and the latter to our ears ; 
 each kind having its own particular al- 
 phabet, which must be mastered. 
 
 166. W AND U ALIKE IN SOUND. — 
 
 Wand, an-guish, be-witch, con-sue-tude, 
 an-ti-qua-ry, con-quest, buo-y, man-sue- 
 tude, as-suage, lan-guid, wo-ful, words; 
 the wolf whose howl's his watch : a 
 w T ight well versed in waggery, and a 
 worthy youth both young and wise, and 
 rich in worldly wealth ; weave well the 
 warp of life. W is silent when it im- 
 mediately precedes r : wrap, wreck, be- 
 wray, wrath, written, wrong ; wriggle, 
 wreath, wretch, wrist, wren, wring, 
 wright ; also in sword, answer, widow, 
 mellow, hollow, who, whole, whom, 
 whose, wright, know, &c. 
 
 167. Keep a watchful and jealous 
 eye over common opinions, prejudices 
 and bad school instruction, until the in- 
 fluence of reason, nature and truth, is 
 so far established over the ear and taste, 
 as to obviate the danger of adopting, 
 or following, unquestionable errors, and 
 vicious habits of reading and speaking; 
 extended views, a narrow mind extend. 
 To judge righteously of all things, pre- 
 serve the mind in a state of perfect equi- 
 librium, and let a love of truth and 
 goodness govern all its decisions and 
 actions. 
 
 168. TWO OF THE THREE SOUNDS OF 
 
 X— 1, Name sound or Ks, when at the 
 end of accented syllables, and often when 
 it precedes them, if followed by a con- 
 sonant. Axe, box, flax, mix; cox-comb, 
 dex-ter, max-im, next, ox -en, fix, sax- 
 on, vex, wax, yex, ad-mix, coax, ex-ca- 
 vate, bux-om, dox-ol-o-gy, fixt-ure, in- 
 flux, jux-ta-po-si-tion, nox-ious, para- 
 dox, quiX'Ot-ism, syn-tax, text-ure, vex- 
 
 • a-tion, exclude, sex, vixen, or-tho-dox- 
 | y, and hetro-dox-y. 
 
 169. By separating these elements 
 of language, and practicing on them, 
 each by itself, the exact position and 
 effort of the vocal organs, may be dis- 
 tinctly observed ; and in this way, the 
 true means of increasing and improving 
 the force and quality of every one ascer- 
 tained. Be not discouraged at the ap- 
 parent mechanical, artificial and con- 
 strained modes of giving the 'sounds, 
 and pronouncing the words : acquire 
 accuracy, and ease and gracefulness 
 will inevitably follow. 
 
 170. The second sound of X is of 
 gz, generally when it immediately pre- 
 cedes the accent, and is followed by a 
 vowel sound or the letter h. Aux-ilia- 
 ry, ex-acts, ex-empt, ex-haust, ex-u ber- 
 ant, ex-ult, ex-am-ine, ex-ag-ge-rate, 
 exec u-tive, ex ist-ence, ex-oner-ate; 
 lux-u-ri ous, anx-ie-ty ; ex-asperate, 
 ex-ec-utors, ex-hil-e-rate, exhaustion, 
 ex hale, ex-or-di-um, ex-er-tion, ex-am- 
 ine the Scriptures, and exhibit examples 
 of good works. For the third sound of 
 x, see the third sound of C. 
 
 171. Two objects are to be accom- 
 plished by these lessons and exercises : 
 the acquiring a knowledge of the vowel 
 and consonant sounds, and a facility in 
 pronouncing them : by means of which 
 the voice is partially broken and ren- 
 dered flexible as well as controllable, 
 and the obstacles to a clear and distinct 
 articulation removed : therefore, prac- 
 tice much, and dwell on every elementa- 
 ry sound, taking the letters separately, 
 and then combining them into syllables, 
 words and sentences. 
 
 172. Xtraordinary Play upon Xes. 
 — Charles X. x king of France, was 
 xtravagantly xtolled, but is xceedingly 
 xecrated. He xhibited xtraordinary 
 xcellence in xigency ; he was xemplary 
 in xternals, but xtrinsic on xamination; 
 he was xtatic under xhortation, xtreme 
 in xcitement, and xtraordinary in xtem- 
 pore xpression. He was xpatriated for 
 his xcesses, and to xpiate his xtrava- 
 gance, xisted and xpired in xile. [The 
 x in exhibited, exemplary, examination, 
 existed, and exile sounds like gz ; in 
 all the others it is like ks.] 
 
 173. Beading— should be a perfect 
 faci-simile of correct speaking, and both 
 
22 
 
 exact copies of real iife ; hence, read 
 just as you would naturally speak on 
 the same subject, and under similar cir- 
 cumstances ; so, that if any one hears 
 you, but does not see you, he cannot tell 
 whether you are reading or speaking. 
 Remember that nothing is denied to i 
 industry and perseverance ; and that no- 
 thing valuable can be obtained without 
 them. 
 
 174. One of the three sounds of Y.' 
 It should be Ye. — Yale, yard, yawl, 
 yams ; years, yell ; yield, yoke, yawn, 
 yap, yearn, yeast, yel-low, your-self, 
 yes-ter-day, youth-ful, yet, yelp, yaw, 
 yes-ty waves, yoke, young-ster, yeo- 
 man-ry. For the long and short vowel 
 sounds of y, as in rhyme, and hymn, 
 see the two sounds of I, in isle and in. 
 Mr. Yew, did you say, or did you not say, 
 what I said you said ? because Mr. Yew- \ 
 yaw said you never said what I said you ' 
 said : now if you say that you did not ' 
 say what I said you said, then pray what j 
 did you say ? 
 
 175. An accute knowledge of these ! 
 elementary sounds, which constitute our I 
 vocal alphabet, and the exact co-opera- 
 tion of the appropriate organs to give 
 them truly, is essential to the attain- 
 ment of a good and efficient elocution. 
 Therefore, be resolved to understand all 
 about them ; and in your various efforts 
 to accomplish this important object, give 
 precision and full force to every "sound, 
 and practice faithfully, and often, the 
 difficult and rapid changes of the vocal 
 powers, required by the enunciation of ; 
 a^ quick succession of the muscle break- 
 ers. 
 
 176. E, I, U and Y pronounced simi- 
 larly. Al-ien-ate, ax-iom,bil-ious, guide, 
 cloth-ier, Eu-rope, hal-iards, flg-ure, 
 rapt-ure, na-iad, virt-ue, cult-ure, bagn- 
 io, per-fld-ious, dis-guise, court-ier, 
 guile, jun-ior, ple-be-ian, rufT-ian, coll- 
 ier, span-iel, grand-eur, val-ient-ly, viz- 
 ier, Eu-ti-chus, Christ-ian, fa-mil-iar, 
 gen-ius, un-ion, seign-iors, clar-ion, fil- 
 ial, eu pho-ny, eu-lo-gy, past-ure, creat- 
 ure, sold-ier, dis-un-ion, bril-iant-ly, 
 nat-ure, con-spic-u-ous, gest-ure, ple- 
 iads. Some of these letters have their 
 vowel sound following the consonant 
 sound of Y. 
 
 177. The first step to improvement 
 is, to awaken the desire of improvement : 
 
 whatever interests the heart, and excites 
 the imagination, will do this. The second 
 is — a clear and distinct classification of 
 the principles on which an art is based, 
 and an exact expression of them, in accor- 
 dance with this classification ; indeed, 
 all the arts and sciences should be seen 
 in definite delineations, thro' a language 
 which cannot well be misunderstood. 
 
 178. One of the three sounds of Ch, 
 which may be represented by tch. — 
 Change, charge, chaw T , chal-ice ; cheat, 
 chest , chide, chill ; choke, choose, chop ; 
 church, chew, pinch, ur-chin, crutch, 
 lurch, choice, chouse, chafe, charms, 
 chalk, chap-el, chives, (not syves,) arch - 
 chan-cel-lor, chip, cher-ry, child, chick- 
 en, chore, chap, chuck-le, chow-der, 
 chaste, chant-ing, char-i-ty, cheer-i-ly, 
 cher-ub, chim-ney, chit-chat, Chi-li, 
 Nor-wich, Ips-wich, Sa-chem, Wool- 
 wich. 
 
 170. Many consider elocution mere- 
 ly as an accomplishment, and that a de- 
 sultory, instead of a systematic attention, 
 is all that is necessary. A regular, 
 scientific and progressive course, in this, 
 as well as in every thing else, is the on- 
 ly correct, effectual, and rapid mode of 
 proceeding If improvement is the ob- 
 ject, whether we can devote little, or 
 much attention, to a pursuit, mental or 
 manual, system and method are abso- 
 lutely essential : order — is heaven's first 
 and last law. 
 
 180. Ch— tch, Ac-crouch, blanch'd, 
 de-tach-ments, flitch, latch, mer-chan- 
 dize, pinch, twitch, chess, quench, touch, 
 French, pinch, clutch, un-char-i-ta-ble, 
 a-chieve, blanch, hitch, peach, rich, sach- 
 els, touch, un-church, wrench, coach, 
 chief-tain. Three chubby children, in 
 Richfield, were each choked withchoice 
 chunks of cheese, much of which San- 
 cho Panza purchased of Charles Chick- 
 ering on Chimborazo. 
 
 181. In all cases of producing our 
 sounds, observe the different positions 
 of the organs, and remember that the 
 running through with the forty four 
 sounds of our language, is like running 
 up the keys of an instrument, to see if 
 every thing is all right : be satisfied of 
 nothing, short of a complete mastery 
 over the whole subject. Be very par- 
 ticular in converting all the breath that 
 escapes into sound, when reading or 
 
23 
 
 singing ; and remember, that the purer 
 the sound, the easier it may be made, 
 the less will be the injury to the vocal 
 organs, the farther it will be heard, and 
 with the more pleasure will it be listen- 
 ed to : do not forget the end, the cause, 
 and the effect. 
 
 182. Vowel sounds are all produced 
 in the larynx ; and, on their emission, 
 the articulating organs make them into 
 words. These words constitute lan- 
 guage, which is used, by common con- 
 sent, as signs of ideas ; or, as mediums 
 for the manifestation of thought and 
 feeling ; it may be written, or spoken ; 
 and the natural results are books, pa- 
 pers and conversation : by means of 
 which, the conceptions and affections of 
 human minds are made known and per- 
 petuated. 
 
 183. Th have two sounds. 1, Lis- 
 ping sound, improperly called Sharp. — 
 Thane; thaw-eth, thank, the-ist, ther- 
 mal, thigh, think: tho-ral thor-ough, 
 for-sooth, breadths, plinth, be-troth'd^ 
 strength-en'st, bath, berths, cloth, death,' 
 hearth, lath, months, path, south, truth, 
 wealth, youth ; a the-ist, be-thrall, de- 
 throne, filth, heath, Matth-ew, mouth, 
 pro-thon~o-ta-ry, qua-keth, twelfths, 
 breadth, Frith of Forth, lith-o-graph, 
 thatch-eth : Faith, quoth the thief, the 
 tooth appeareth the third, fourth, fifth, 
 sixth, seventh, eight, ninth, tenth, elev- 
 enth and twelfth tirftes. 
 
 184. The thistle Sifter.— Theophilus 
 Thistle, the successful thistle sifter, in 
 sifting a, seive full of unsifted thistles, 
 thrust three thousand thistles thro' the 
 thick of his thumb : if then Theophilus 
 Thistle, the successful thistle sifter, in 
 sifting a seive full of unsifted thistles, 
 thrust three thousand thistles thro' the 
 thick of his thumb ; see that thou, in 
 sifting a seive full of unsifted thistles 
 dost not thrust three thousand thistles 
 through the thick of thy thumb : success 
 to the successful thistle sifter, who doth 
 not get the thistles in his tongue. 
 
 185. The sound of Th is the vocal 
 lisping ; improperly called flat. — That, 
 thee, then, thine, this, thou, than, with, 
 blithe, loath, swathe, where with, baths, 
 youths, paths, cloths, truths, laths, oaths, 
 hearths, be-neath, al-though, thith-er, 
 seethe; mouths, un-sheath, smooth, un- 
 derneath; moths, swa-thing. Sheathe 
 
 thy sword, till I wreathe the worthy 
 bear ; whether I gather or not, I rather 
 not be pothered with that smoothe scythe, 
 which your brother got of my father. 
 
 186. Jaw-breakers.- -Thou wreath'd'st 
 and muzzl'd'st the far-fetch'd ox, and 
 imprison'd'st him in the Volcanic Mexi- 
 can mountain of Popocatapetl in Coto- 
 paxi. Thou prob'd'st my wounds and 
 troubl'd'st my rack'd ribs. Thou trifl'd'st 
 with his acts, that thou black'n'd'st and 
 contaminated'st with his nlch'd char- 
 acter. Thou lov'd'st the elves when 
 thou heard'st and quick'n'd'st my heart's 
 tuneful harps. Thou wa^g'd'st thy 
 prop'd up head, because thou thrust'd'st. 
 three hundred and thirty three thistles 
 thro' the thick of that thumb, that thou 
 cur'd'st of the barb'd shafts. 
 
 187. Wh. 1. Whale, wheel, while, 
 which, what, whine,, whans:, whig, whelm, 
 whirl, when, w'by, whilom, wheeze, 
 wh if- He-tree, (not whippletree,) whim- • 
 sey, whip-poor-will, wheat, (not weet,) 
 whelp, whit-tle, wharf, white-wash, 
 whee-dle, whip, wher-ret, whit-ster. 
 
 188. The 44 Sounds of our Language, 
 in their Alphabetical order. — A 4 ; Ale, 
 are, all, at : B 1 : bribe : C 4; cent, clock, 
 suffice, ocean : D 2 ; did, fac'd : E 2 ; 
 eel, ell : F 2 ; fife, of : G3; gem, go, 
 rouge : II 1 ; hope : I 2 ; isle, ill : J 1 ; 
 judge : K 1; kirk, L 1 ; lily : M 1 ; mmf, : 
 N 2 ; nun, bank : O 3 : old, ozze, on : P 
 1; pipe : Q 1; queen : R 2 5 arm, rough : 
 S4; so, is, sure,* treasiuy: T 2; pit, 
 nation : U 3; mute, up. full : V 1 ; vivid : 
 W2; wall, bow : X 3; flax, exist, beaux : 
 Y 3 ; youth, rhyme, hymn : Z2; ziz- 
 zag, azure: Ch 3; church, chaise, ch'i- 
 Gh3; laugh, ghost. lough : Ph 2; sphere, 
 nephew : Th 2; thin, that, Wh 1 : whale : 
 Oi ; oil : Ou ; sound : Several are dupli- 
 cates. 
 
 189. Causes of hoarseness. — That 
 unpleasant sensation, which is called 
 hoarseness in speaking, is produced by 
 the emission of breath, that is not con- 
 verted into sound ; which may be seen, 
 in an extreme, by whispering a few 
 minutes. The reason why the breath 
 is not manufactured into sound, in thus 
 speaking, is, that the thorax, (or lungs.) 
 is principally used; and when this 
 the case, there is always an expai sioi 
 the chest, and consequently, a lack of 
 power to produce sounds in a pn 
 
24 
 
 manner : Therefore, some of the breath, 
 on its emission through the glottis, over 
 the epiglottis, and through the back part 
 of the mouth, .chafes up their surfaces, 
 producing a swelling of the muscles in 
 those parts, and terminating in what is 
 called hoarseness. 
 
 190. Orthography, or Right Spel- 
 ling. As we have two kinds of lan- 
 guage, written and spoken, so there are 
 two modes of spelling ; one addressed to 
 the eye, and exhibited by naming the let- 
 ters ; and the other, addressed to the ear, 
 and spelled by giving the sounds, which 
 the letters represent : the former method, 
 which is the common one, tends to the use 
 of the throa., or lungs, and is one of the 
 fruitful sources of consumption ; the 
 latter mode ; which is the new one, serves 
 to keep up the natural use of the appro- 
 priate muscles, and tends to prevent, as 
 well as cure, dyspepsia, liver and lung 
 complaints, and diseases of the throat. 
 
 191. Classification of the Conson- 
 ants. The first natural division of the 
 Consonants are into Vocals and Aspir- 
 ates. Of the Vocal there are. as they 
 stand in the Alphabet and their combina- 
 tions, twenty six ; but deducting the de- 
 plicates there are but seventeen, viz. : b, 
 as in bib ; c, as in suffice ; d, as in dead ; 
 
 /, as in of ; g, as in gem, go, rouge • 
 I, as in ill ; m, as in me ; n, as in none, 
 bank ; r, as in err, pride ; w, as in wo ; 
 x, as in exist ; y, as in yet ; and th as 
 in this ; all of which should be given 
 separately, as well as combined, and their 
 distinctions observed. . 
 
 192. After the pupil has become tol- 
 erably familiar with reading by vowel 
 sounds, and spelling as above recom- 
 mended, let him be exercised in reading 
 by both vowel and consonant sounds • 
 i. e. by giving a perfect analysis of all 
 the sounds, found in any of the words of 
 the sentence before him ; which involves 
 every thing which relates to sounds, 
 whether single, double, or triple, and to 
 articulation, accent, pronunciation, and 
 emphasis. No one should wish to be 
 excused from these very useful and im- 
 portant exercises ; for they are directly 
 calculated to develop and improve the 
 voice, the ear, and the manner, and im- 
 part that kind of knowledge of this sub- 
 ject, which will be felt to be power, and 
 give one confidence in his own abilities. 
 
 193. There are, according to therr 
 representatives, of the aspirate or breath 
 sounds, twenty-one ; omitting the du- 
 plicates, (or letters having the same 
 sound,) there are only eleven, viz : c, as 
 in cent, clock, ocean ; d, as in fac'd - f 
 /, as in fife ; h, as in hoe ; p, as in 
 pipe • x, as in mix ; ch, as in church ; 
 th, as in thin ; and wh, as in w r here - f 
 whence it appears, by actual analysis, 
 that we have sixteen vowel sounds, 
 and tvventy eight consonant sounds ; 
 making in all forty four. 
 
 194. Every thing in the universe, 
 both of mind and of matter, exists in ref- 
 erence to certain fixed principles, which 
 are called laws of order, originating in 
 the GREAT FIRST CAUSE, and 
 thence emanating, throughout all crea- 
 tion, animate and inanimate; and so long 
 and so jar, as these laws are obeyed, (i. e_ 
 kept,) we are shielded from all evils, 
 physical and spiritual : hence, if a man 
 
 . suffers, either in mind, or body? from 
 ! within, or without, the cause of the suf- 
 fering is an infringement of the Laws 
 of Life : for God is as unwilling that his 
 creatures should suffer corporeally, as 
 that any should be lost. Such, then, 
 are our constitutions, and relations, that 
 we cannot will, think, or act, without 
 obeying, or violating, these laws of life, 
 of being, of God. Oh the lengths, the 
 breadths, the heights, and the depths of 
 the wisdom and love of God, as mani- 
 fested in the creation, redemption and 
 salvation of MAN. 
 
 195. The second division of the Con- 
 sonants is into simple, and compound : 
 of the former, there are twenty, includ- 
 ing the duplicates : viz, c, in city ; c, 
 cab ; d, do ; d, pip'd; /, fifty; g, gull T - 
 h, hope ; k, make ; I, bill ; m, mile ; % 
 no ; p, pop ; q, quote ; r, corn ; s, see - 
 t, tune; ch, chyle; gh, tough; gh, 
 ghastly; and ph, eph a :— omitting the 
 duplicate representatives, there are but 
 eleven ; viz, c, cypress ; c, ac-me ; d, 
 day ; d, tripp'd ; /, foe ; g, give; I, lay ; 
 m, mote ; n, nine ; p, pass ; r } more ^ 
 compare, and see. 
 
 196. The human skeleton, (a perfect 
 work of a perfect Being,) with its naked 
 ribs, &c, is so associated, in the com 1 - 
 mon mind, with death, and the grave, 
 the loss of friends, and the terrors of the 
 dark future } that many persons regari 
 
 K 
 
25 
 
 it with abhorrence : but to the lover of 
 truth, and nature, who rises above time, 
 place, and matter, from effect to cause, 
 the admirable adaptation of all its ports 
 to their varied purposes, make it an ob- 
 ject of the most intense interest : we are, 
 indeed "fearfully and wonderfully made." 
 Well might we exclaim " What a piece 
 of work is man !" " The greatest study 
 of mankind is man." Such wonderful 
 mechanism reveals the hand of a Divine; 
 and they, who contemplate, and under- 
 stand, its structure and uses aright, 
 who look through nature up to nature's 
 GOD, may be truly said to commune, 
 not only with themselves, but with their 
 Maker. 
 
 197. Of the compound Consonants 
 we have twenty three, viz : c,.(z) discern ; 
 c, (sh,) social ; /, (v.) thereof; g, (dg,) 
 gibe; g, (zh,) badinage; j, (dg,) 
 judge ; n. (ng,) bank ; r, (burr'd,) trill ; 
 s, (z) was ; 5, (sh,) sure ; s, (zh,) leis- 
 ure ; t, (sh,) rational ; v, vivacity ; w, 
 wist; x, (ks,) ox; x, (z,) Xenia ; y, 
 youth ; z, zigz££ ; ch, (tch,) such ; ch, 
 (sh,) chagrin ; ph. (v.) nephew ; th, 
 thick ; th, tho ? ; wh, why ; deducting the 
 duplicates, we have but twelve.; c, (z,) 
 3 (sh,)/, (v,) g, (zh,) n. (ng,) r, (trill' d,) 
 x, (ks,) x, (gz,) ch, (tch,) th, (think,) th, 
 (that,) and wh, (when :) let them be ex- 
 emplified. 
 
 198, Origin of language. Plato says 
 that language is of Divine imposition ; 
 that human reason, from a defect in the 
 knowledge of natures and qualities, 
 which are indicated by names, could 
 not determine the cog-/wm-i-na of things. 
 He also maintains, that names are the 
 vehicles of substances : that a fixed analo- 
 gy, or correspondence, exists between 
 the name and the thing; that language, 
 therefore, is not arbitrary in its origin, 
 but fixed by the laws of analogy, and 
 that God alone, who knows the nature 
 of things, originally imposed names 
 strictly expressive of their qualities. 
 Zeno, Cle-ctt-thes, Chry-s? 7 ^-pus, and oth- 
 ers, were of the same opinion . 
 
 199# Accent is a louder stress or 
 expulsion of voice, on short vowels, 
 and quantity, or prolongation of sound, 
 with expulsive force, on long, ones. Its 
 use is to convert letters or syllables in- 
 to words expressive of ideas, and its 
 effect distinctness of articulation and 
 
 melody of speech and song. 1. By ex- 
 pulsive stress ; and may be thus repre- 
 sented, r ■ diminuendo, or 
 71 crescendo : am-pli-fy, ej»- 
 ti-ty, lm-mense, om-i-nous, um-brel-la, 
 ac-cu-ra-cy, cer-e-mony, ng-u-ra-tive, 
 com-pe-ten-cy, up-right-!y, cat-e-pil-lai, 
 for-get-ful-ness, no-bil-ity, or-a-tc-ry, un„ 
 just-ly, math-e-mat-ies, su perin-tend, 
 af-fa-bil-i-ty, cor-res-pon-dence. un-m- 
 struct-ive. 
 
 200. Physiology is derived from 
 two Greek words, Phu sis (nature) and 
 leg o (to discourse) and signifies a dis- 
 course, or treatise, of nature ; accord- 
 ing to which meaning, every materia! 
 substance has its physiology : hence, 
 there is the Physiology of the earth, ef 
 minerals, of plants, of animals, of lan- 
 guage, &e., but the word is now used 
 in a more limited sense, as signifying 
 the science and functions of all the 
 different parts, or organs of animals and 
 plants; that is, their nature and the 
 uses which they perform, in the econo- 
 my of every individual existence. Or, 
 it may be denominated, the Science of 
 active organization of life, as mans- 
 fested in natural subjects : in other 
 words, the Phenomena ot living bodies: 
 here it is used, principally, in reference 
 to the human body, its parts, and, as a 
 whole : but the body is one thing, and 
 the mind another; they can exist in 
 connection, or the mind may exist entire- 
 ly independent of the body, in a spiritu- 
 al state of being ; while the body ex- 
 ists only a short time, after the depart- 
 ure of the soul— spirit, or real man. 
 
 201. 2. By quanhtu, which may be 
 thus represented. * > contin- 
 uous, or -*=zzZZI^=*- swell ; as, a-gent, 
 ar-dent, aw-ful, e-go-tism, i-dol-ize, o-di- 
 ous, oo- zy, uniform, un-fruit-ful. oil-i- 
 ness, out-ter-most ■ a-o-rist, ar-mo-ry, 
 awk-ward-ly, e-qua-ble, i-ro-ny, o-li-o r 
 moon-shine, u-ni-verse, un-ob-tru sive, 
 moi-ety, pouncet-box ; a-b-c-da-ri-an, 
 par-the-non, pawn-broker, en-cy-clo- 
 pe-di-a, in vi-ta-to-ry, op-probri-ons- 
 ness, nu-ga to-ry, truth-fulness, bois- 
 ter-ous, pow-der-mill, pa-per-mill, far 
 ther-most, draw-bridge, e yea-tide, i-o- 
 dyne, no-ble-man, moon-struck, mu-si- 
 cal, bull-finch, noisome, boun ti-ful-ly. 
 
 Notes. Every accented vowel should 
 be distinguished, in its appropriaVo 
 
26 
 
 xray, by feeing made as prominent to 
 She ear, as the following accented vow- 
 els are to the eye : a-bAse-ment mAt- 
 ri-mo-ny, im-pE-rious, in-Ex-o-ra-ble, 
 &c. 2. la singing, accent is always 
 made by stress, never by quantity : and 
 the first note in each full measure is 
 accented. 3. Observe how lively, va- 
 ried and interesting a passage is when 
 pronounced with proper accentual 
 force ;' and see how insipid and monot- 
 onous without it. Always let your ac- 
 cent be well marked and sustained; 
 then your delivery will be brilliant, 
 sprightly and effective. 
 
 202. The seat of accent is often 
 changed to convey a different meaning; 
 as ac-cewf, accent; des-eii, desert : im- 
 print ; im-j9n^ ; coMect, col-to ; sub- 
 ject, sub-ject ; aw-gust. au-gws* ; ez-port, 
 ex-port; iVi-sult, in- suit ; om-jure, con- 
 jure ; cow-vict, con-vict ; min-uie, mi- 
 nute ; pres-ent, present ; refuse, re- 
 fuss ; dis count, discount ; sur-vey, sur- 
 vey ; trans-pon. ira.ns-port ; cow-test, con- 
 test ; incense, in-cense ; pre-fix, pre-fix; 
 reb-e\, rebel; ^/-lant, gMant; sz-tract, 
 ex-tract ; w-val-id, in-valid; con-verse, 
 converse; protest, pro-test; M-stinet, 
 instinct ; de-tail, de-tail ; produce, pro- 
 duce ; cow-sum-mate, con-sum-male : in- 
 crease, m-cieasb ; pres-age, prt-sZge ; 
 core-fine, con-fine; es-say, essay; pref- 
 ace, pre-jace; fre-ouent, fre-qutnt ; re- 
 tail, re-tail; per- f ume, per-f?/me ; com- 
 pound, corn-pound. Thus, we make 
 accent by expulsive stress, when the ac- 
 cented vowels are short ; and when long 
 by quantity, 
 
 203, The mere mention of Oratory, 
 reminds us of the early times of Egypt, 
 Greece and Rome ; when there flour- 
 ished a Levite, who was an important 
 instrument in delivering an ancient 
 people from captivity ; one of whose 
 qualifications for his high office, was, 
 that he could " speak well :' n a Demos- 
 thenes, the magic, music, and witchery 
 of whose eloquence, it is impossible to 
 translate or describe ; a Cicero, whose 
 oratory was copious, correct, ornate, 
 and magnificent : each of whom was 
 preeminent in his own style and man- 
 ner, — the Grecian carrying the Citadel 
 by storm, and the Roman taking it alter 
 a regular and most beautifully conduc- 
 ted, sieges: of a Peter, and Paul, plead- 
 
 ing the cause of Heaven, and holding 
 vast multitudes in breathless silence, 
 making even Judges tremble in their 
 high places : of more modern times, 
 whose history presents us the name of 
 a Chatham, a Burke, and a Fox in the 
 assembly : and those of a Bourdaloue, 
 Massillon Bridane,^nd Whitfield, in the 
 pulpit ; also the orators of our own time 
 and land ; some of whom, in many re- 
 spects, will not suffer by a comparison 
 with any of their illustrious predeces- 
 sors. 
 
 204. Half accented vowel sounds. 
 There is an inferior or half accent, on 
 certain words of three or more sylla- 
 bles, which should be observed ; and 
 although given distinctly, must be kept 
 within the vanish of the accented ones. 
 Con-ver-sA-tion, U-A-ra, pro^-o-si-tion , 
 co-a-lEsce, prov-i-dEn-tial. man-i-fes-U- 
 tions, AL-a-bfls-ter, met-a-PH\ T s-i-cal, 
 dem-on-STRA-tion, het-e-ro-GE-ne-ous- 
 ness, hyp-o-coN-dri-a, vi-o-lin, rec-om- 
 MEN-da-to-ry, prfld-i-GAL-i-ty, dem-o- 
 cRAT-ic, dm-pli-fi-cA-tidh, su-per-a-bun- 
 dant, hy-dro-pho-bi-a, plen-i-po-fen-ti-a- 
 ry. an-ti-di-lu-vi-an, in-com-pre-hen-si- 
 ble. 
 
 205. Unaccented Vowels. There is 
 a great beauty in pronunciation^ where 
 each letter, that is not silent, tells upon 
 the ear its true character, and all con- 
 tribute to produce the desired effect : 
 hence, the great necessity of giving to 
 all letters, syllables, and words their 
 proper sounds ; especially, the vowels, 
 whether long, or short, accented or un- 
 accented ; as at-tempt, de-spatch, ef-fect. 
 can-o-py, per-spic-u-ous, oc-ca-sion, 
 prej-u-dice, e-vent, vol-un ta-ry, reg-u- 
 lar-ly, e-mo-tion, del-e-gate, o-pinion, 
 man-u-script, of-fence, ter-rj-ble. o-bit-u- 
 a-ry, oc-u-lar, red-o-lent. possi-ble, ac 
 com-plish, particularly. 
 
 206. The body consists of three dis- 
 tinct parts, systems or degrees of exis- 
 tence : 1st. The Osseous or Bony part, 
 called the Skeleton : 2nd.yThe Muscu- 
 lar, or Fleshy part : and, 3rd. The Ner- 
 vous, system, which forms the connect- 
 ing link between the mind and body. 
 The mind, therefore, acts upon the 
 nerves, and through the nerves on the 
 fleshy parts, and through these on the 
 bony parts. Again, we may consider 
 the human frame under three divisions, 
 
27 
 
 ©r stories, 1st, The Upper, or head and the others must be pronounced, depend* 
 neck ; 2nd, The Middle, or trunk, con- i ing as they do on the radicals, or as- 
 sisting ut' the breast and abdomen, with ' cents. Exs. dis-iN-ter-est-ed-ness; com- 
 Their contents ; and 3rd, The Extrem- Mu-ni-ca-tive-ly • in-Ex-pli-ca-ble 5 rea- 
 lties, or ulti mates, comprising the arms son-a-ble-ness ; un-HES-i-ta-tin-gly : nn- 
 and hands, or the upper extremities ; in-tel-li-gi-BiL-i-ty • tri-PER-son-al-ist ; 
 and the legs and feet, or lower extrem- , con-GRAT-u-la-to-ry; lat-i-tu-di-NA-ri-an- 
 ities. Again, we may contemplate the ism ; au-THOR-i-ta-tive-ly ; in-com-pre- 
 vital pans of the body under three di- ; hen-si-BiL-i-ty ; im-ma-te-ri-AL-i-ty : ir- 
 visions, or stories; for all the extremities j REF-ra-ga-ble ; per-EMp-to-ri-ly ; slov- 
 may be cut off, and still we might live. ' en-li-ness '; hi-e-ro -G-LYPH-i-eal ly ; ir- 
 lst. The Stomach, Liver. &c, 2nd. : REv-o-ca-ble • anti pes-ti-LEN-tial. In 
 The Heart and Lungs, separated from the above are three words accented by 
 the lower story by tlie diaphragm ; and quantity : which are they ? 
 3rd, The Brain, including the cerebel- 1 210. Without bones we could not 
 lutn and cerebrum. Seethe engra j stand, nor move from place to place ; 
 vings of the Manikin. ! nor, without language of some kind, 
 
 207. A too frequent recurrence of .could we convey our thoughts and feel- 
 accented vowels, occasions a heavy ut- ings to others. The skeleton, or frame- 
 terance, in consequence of the almost work of the body, which is the lower or 
 continual succession of vocal efforts : it ' outermost degree, consists of three dis- 
 is seen and felt in words, particularly tinct parts : 1. cartilage, or gristle, form - 
 the monosyllables, and in sentences, or ed of a soft celular tissue filled with a 
 members of sentences, and is the cause gluey substance : 2. phosphate of lime, 
 of the slow rale in the movement of the | in large abundance : and 3. carbonate 
 voice. Exs. And ten low words oft of lime, or common chalk, in small pro- 
 creep in one dull line. O'er hills, o'er portion. Bones are peculiar for their 
 dales, o'er crags, o'er rocks they go. Up j compactness, density, force of resistance 
 the high hill he heaves a huge round j and want of elasticity : hence they are 
 stone. Whenever accent occurs Ire- called the hard parts, in contra- distinc- 
 quently, there is always a predominance i tion to the sojt or fleshy parts, and num.- 
 of quantity, and the delivery, of necessi- j ber 252. In words, or language, we 
 ty, is much slower. Now here we have ! have three kinds of letters, vowels, vo- 
 positive evidence that monosyllables ! cal consonants and aspirates ; containing 
 have accent ; the authorities generally, j more or less of feeling and thought, ul- 
 to the contrary notwithstanding. Our i timating in effect. 
 
 best authorsuse the shortest words, which j 211. Pauses, are indications of si- 
 are usually of Saxon origin : hence, the | lence • they were introduced with the 
 charm, the witchery of certain speakers. 1 art of Printing ; and it is questionable, 
 
 208. Pronunciation— is orthoepy ; j whether they have aided much in 
 which is pronouncing words according i learning to read or speak: for if there 
 
 to euphony, analogy and custom : these 
 constitute the standard : the principle 
 rule is to pronounce in the easiest and 
 
 were no pauses, Ave should be compelled 
 to exercise the mind so far as necessary 
 to understand the author. Pauses in 
 
 most effectual manner : and when > Speech, are analagous to Rests in Music.; 
 words are introduced from other Ian- j and there are seven diflerent kinds in 
 guages they should be pronounced ac- both arts: all of which must be through- 
 cording to the principles of our Ian- ly understood, in their essence, to read, 
 guage ; that is, they must conform to j write, or sing correctly. The true prin- 
 the genius of the English language, as j ciples of notation, or pauses, are found 
 
 only in the measure of speech, which is 
 based in the philosophy of mind, invol- 
 
 foreigners do to that of our Constitution 
 when they become naturalized — abjur- 
 ing foreign, uncongenial influences and 
 principles, and submitting to ours. 
 
 200. A too urtfrequent occurrence 
 of accented vowels produce indistinct* 
 ness ; because of the rapidity with which 
 
 vmg the exercise of thinking and feel- 
 ing. The use of pauses is in .. 
 making the sense clearer, and should be 
 only just long enough to answer their 
 end. 
 
28 
 
 21$. Variety of Accented and Un- 
 accented Vowels. — When they are a- 
 greeably interspersed, neither a heavy 
 utterance, nor indistinctness occur. 
 Exs. "Not so, when swift Camilla 
 scours the plain, Flies o'er the unbend- 
 ing corn and' skims along the main." 
 Observe, that when the accent is at, or 
 near the beginning of the word, it aids, 
 materially, the expulsive stress of voice, 
 in carrying us more easily through the 
 word, than when it is placed near the 
 last end : the genius of our language is 
 in favor of the former j hence, the ten- 
 dency is to remove the accent to the be- 
 ginning, which makes language more 
 powerful and effective. In running, the 
 impetus of preceding efforts carries us 
 on after those efforts have ceased. 
 
 213. By a burning heat/the gristle or 
 ani mal matter, that holds the bones to- 
 gether, can be destroyed ; when the earthy 
 substance will crumble like a piece of 
 chalk : and by putting bones into certain 
 acids, the earthy parts may be dissolved, 
 when the cartilage, or gristly part, will 
 remain, in perfect form, and become so 
 flexible that it can be tied into a knot. 
 In a certain manner, here taught, speech 
 can be divested of its consonants, when 
 Che vowels become flexible ; so also, in 
 song, where the pure vocals may be 
 greatly varied by the well tuned voice 
 and ear. 
 
 Notes. — 1. Distinguish the vowel 
 sounds of the following words, by the ap- 
 propriate pronunciation : ab-o-li-tion, eb- 
 ul-li-tion ; ac-cept, ex-cept ; con-fi-dant, 
 con-ri-dent ; du-al, du-el ; fi-na-ry, fi-ne- 
 ry ; mo-dal, mod-el ; par-son-age, per- 
 son-age ; pen-dant, pen-dent ; rad-ish, 
 red-ish ; sal-a-ry, cel-e-ry ; ba-ron, bar- 
 ren ; cap-i-tal, cap-i-tol ; ap-po-site, op- 
 po-site. 2. Always infill perfectly, the 
 accented vowel, and more so, in propor- 
 tion as the word is important ; i. e. shape 
 the vowel sound completely, by the ap- 
 propriate organs and give it all its ne- 
 cessary power, filling it full of the influ- 
 ence of mind, in the proportion as you 
 wish your ideas to be impressive and 
 abiding. Mind possesses a magnifying 
 power over words, making them mean 
 more than they naturally do. 
 
 214. On looking at a skeleton, or its 
 representative, it is seen to consist of 
 numerous bones, connected by numerous 
 
 joints, or articulations, which are cover- 
 ed with elastic cartilages, &c. to prevent 
 friction; each joint is supplied with a ve- 
 ry delicate and smooth sac ; or membrane 
 containing an oily fluid (synovia) which, 
 serves a similar purpose as oil does on 
 an axletree, making it work easily : a 
 pig's foot or a joint of its leg, is a good 
 illustration. Observation and experi- 
 ence show us analogies in words and 
 speech, when the proper effort is made : 
 the feelings are the unctious fluid, and 
 Vowels their receptacles, which convey 
 it to the hard consonants. 
 
 215. Education, means trie develope- 
 ment and proper use of the body, and 
 relates to the training and guardianship 
 of youth, from infancy to mature age — 
 to the influencing of the character and 
 prospects, not only of individuals, but of 
 nations. The highest power and noblest 
 sentiments of our nature might remain 
 forever dormant, were they not developed 
 and matured by the wise and good. In 
 a still wider sense, it may mean the 
 whole training of the thoughts and affec- 
 tions by inward reflection and outward 
 events and actions, by intercourse with 
 men, "by the spirits of the just made 
 perfect" — by instruction from the word 
 — the training the whole soul for life and 
 immortality. 
 
 216. Observations. — Neither Teach- 
 ers nor Parents, can be too wisely care- 
 ful of the influence exerted upon their 
 pupils and children : for the principles 
 apply to both matter and spirit." — 
 "Just as the twig is bent the tree's in- 
 clined." Again, since thoughts are im- 
 perishable existences, we should be care- 
 ful in entertaining and cherishing any 
 other than such as we are willing to 
 have for oup companions, during our 
 eternal state of being in the future world. 
 Here then is something for all of us to 
 attend to ; and unspeakable consequen- 
 ces are depending on the performance of 
 duty : and are we of the number of those 
 who turn back in the day of battle ? 
 or of those who gird on their armor, and 
 do or die ? 
 
 217. Pauses. There are two kinds 
 of Pauses ; G rammatical, distinguished 
 by characters, and addressed to the eye : 
 such as the Comma, (,) Semicolon," (;) 
 Colon, (:) Period, (.) Interrogation, (?) 
 Exclamation, (!)and Parenthesis, [(-)]: 
 
29 
 
 and Rhetorical, dictated by the sense, 
 and usually addressed only to the ear ; 
 here, it is indicated generally, by the 
 dash, ( — ) and its length is to be deter- 
 mined by the occasion and subject : and 
 let it be distinctly observed, that inhala- 
 tions should always take place at the 
 rhetorical pause,and usually at the gram- 
 matical pause. Indeed, one of the great 
 secrets of reading, speaking and singing 
 without exhaustion, and with effect, con- 
 sists in the proper management of breath- 
 ing ; not that there should be any thing 
 mechanical in the act, but every thing 
 the result of perfect nature and freedom. 
 218. Some persons may wish for 
 more specific directions, as to the meth- 
 od of bringing the lower muscles of the 
 body into use, for producing sounds, 
 and breathing : the following will suf- 
 fice. Take the proper position, as 
 above recommended, and place the 
 hands on the hips, with the thumbs on 
 the small of the back, and the fingers on 
 the abdominal muscles before ; grasp 
 
 220. Prolongation of Sound, \a% 
 the pupil take a lesson of the ferryman. 
 A traveller arrives at the brink of a widf? 
 river, which he wishes to cross ; one 
 ferry-man is on the other side, and 
 by chance, one is on this side : the 
 traveller halloos in the common speak- 
 ing voice ; using principally the chest ; 
 while his voice soon becomes dissipated. 
 He is informed that his call cannot be 
 heard : listen to rne, says this son of 
 nature ; " ver, 0— - — ver, O 
 
 ver :" making each accented 
 
 vowel one or two seconds long : try it 
 and see, extending your eye and mind 
 at a distance ; which will aid the pro- 
 longation. 
 
 221* Remarks, 1. To accomplish 
 the objects in view, a very great variety 
 of exercises, and examples, are intro- 
 duced, containing sense, and nonsense, 
 and attention can be paid to both kinds 
 according to their uses. 2. Without a 
 good articulation, no one can become a 
 reader, or speaker, and whatever other 
 them tightly; i. e. try to press in the j defects one may have, if he possesses 
 abdomen, and, at the same time, to burst j this excellency, he will be listened to 
 oft' the hands, by an internal effort, in < with pleasure and profit : there is some- 
 the use of the muscles to produce the thing very attractive and winning in a 
 vowel sounds of the following words, at j clear, distinct and correct enunciation, 
 ety it, ot, ut; then leave off the /, giving j which delights and captivates the soul, 
 the vowels the same sound as before : or, | Let no one excuse himself from being 
 imagine you have a belt tied around perfect in this essential requisite, 
 you, just above the hip bones, and make 222# In sudden emotions, to prevent 
 such an effort as would be required to the bones being put out of joint, they arc 
 burst it off; do the same in breathing, furnished with ligaments, which con- 
 persevere, and you will succeed. | sist of condensed cellular tissue, strength- 
 219 As the Grammatical pauses are 1 enedby numerous fibres: seen distinct- 
 familiar to most persons, who will be j ly, in the joints of animals, and felt 
 likely to use this tract, and as they are j when we attempt to bend the leg for- 
 of so frequent occurrence in the exam- > ward, or sidewise. They seem as bra- 
 pies here given, it will be unnecessary ! ces to the joints, and impart to them 
 to say more, respecting them,, than that j firmness of position: analogous to firm- 
 a , marks a silence of one second; a I ness and stability of voice, in the enun- 
 ; of two ; a : of three ; a . of four, an I ciation of words, in opposition toatremu- 
 ? and ! of three or four seconds ; and a I lous and feeble delivery. Let it be re- 
 ( ) of one or two, while the voice drops , membered that the dorsal and abdcmi- 
 on a lower pitch, and moves on more ' nal muscles are the mediums through 
 rapidly, as though we were in haste to * which this sustaining power of voice is 
 get through with the explanatory or il- j given, as well as effect communicated 
 lustrative matter contained within it. ; through our words and actions. 
 Let not. however, the pupil rely too much ! 223. Rhetorical Pauses— may be 
 on these indications of silence, for they j either before, or after, the important 
 are only general rules ; but be govern- | word, or words : if the important word 
 ed by the promptings and guidance of is at the beginning, this pause, occurs 
 his own mind, after bringing it under | after it. Industry — is the guardian of 
 the influence of Reason. ( i/inoctnce. Prosperity— gains friends ; 
 
30 
 
 Adversity — tries them. To hope for 
 perfect happiness— is vain. Imagery — 
 is the garb of Poetry. Feelings— gen- 
 erate thoughts ; and thoughts — reci- 
 procate feelings. Vanity — is pleased 
 with admiration ; Pride — with self- 
 esteem. Dancing — is the poetry of 
 motion. Some — place the bliss in ac- 
 tion, some— in ease ; Those — call it 
 
 PLEASURE; and CONTENTMENT — THESE. 
 
 But if at the ending, it is placed before 
 it. And now, abideth Faith, Hope 
 
 fall victims to this neglect; and littfe 
 is our primary instruction in reading 
 calculated to aid us in appropriate 
 breathing ; the results of which are. ex- 
 ceedingly bad habits, inducing impedi- 
 ments in vocal efforts, disease and 
 death. Oh, when shall we be wise, and 
 understand these things ? How hard tu 
 learn, even by experience! 
 
 227. Delivery and Painting. There 
 is a striking analogy, or correspond- 
 ence, between painting and delivery : 
 
 Charity ; these Jhree ; but the greatest j we have what are called seven primary 
 of these is — Charity. When placed 
 after the leading idea, it excites retro- 
 spection ; but when before it, atten- 
 tion and expectation. 
 
 224. Obs. Many individuals of both 
 sexes, often complain of a very unpleas- 
 ant sensation at the pit of the stomach ; 
 some call it a "death-like feeling ;" oth- 
 
 colors, and seven pitches of sound - f 
 though strictlv speaking, but three of 
 each. Letters are like uncoin pounded 
 paints ; words, like paints prepared (or 
 use ; and when these word* are arrang- 
 ed into proper sentences, they form pic- 
 tures on the canvass of the imagina- 
 tion. Let the following beautiful land- 
 
 ers speak of it as if " the bottom had ! scape be sketched out in the mind : '-On 
 fallen out ;" one of the principal caus- j a mountain, (stretched beneath a hoary 
 es is a want of the proper action of the : willow) Lay a Shepherd swain, and 
 breathing apparatus : the abdominal j view'd the rolling billow." Now re- 
 and dorsal muscles become relaxed, by | view it ; and see every thing as it is— 
 wrong positions and want of appropri- the mountain covered with trees, the o- 
 
 ate exercise and food, when their con- 
 tents fall by their own weight, and the 
 diaphragm does not consequently, act 
 
 cean, &c 
 
 223. Involuntary efforts. Let no 
 one imagine, that it is the design of this 
 
 in a healthful manner. The remedy is system to make arbitrary readers, and 
 a return to the laws of life and being as ■, sneakers ; far from it : if the system 
 here exhibited. were not founded in nature, such 
 
 225. One thing more must be re- ! might be the result. By making use 
 membered, in connection with the os- of the principles here developed, we re- 
 seous system, or bony part of the body, I turn to truth and nature, provided we 
 resembling, in its structure, the liga- ' have wandered from them ; consequent- 
 meats ; it is the periosteum, which ad- ly, the efl'ort becomes involuntary : as 
 heres very closely to the bone, and cov- 1 was the case with the whistling of lime 
 ers it ; except where the ligament and : Jimmy, in'school ; when his teacher 
 muscles, (and those coated with cam- j was about to correct him, he exelaim- 
 lage) originate and are united* Study jed, " No, no, it was not / that whis- 
 and reflection will exhibit the analogies i tied, it whistled itself." 
 of this part also, with certain peculiar-! 220. Rhythmus, or reading Poetry - r 
 ities in spoken and written language. — poetical composition, or verse ; of which 
 There are ladders to knowledge, to in- there are various kinds. Prose is man's 
 tellect, to affection, to heaven : let us j natural language, which is rather loose 
 not stop short of palpable truths; but ; and unconfmed. Poetry, originates in 
 truth not reduced to practice will be of the affections ; prose in tire thoughts, 
 no avail. j of the human mind; tho' some poems 
 
 225. Breathing. When we sit at ; are occasionally prosaic, and some 
 our ease, and are not exercising the \ prose — poetic : FEELiNG^predominates in 
 voice, our breathing is slow and regu- I the former, — thought, in the latter. 
 lar ; and the more we speak, work, or | Our rules for reading and speaking are 
 sing, the more frequently must we in- ! the same ; so are they for reading prose 
 hale fresh air ; because the expenditure ! and poetry : for in all cases, the man- 
 is greater at such times ; many persons • ker must be adapted to the matter r 
 
31 
 
 the sound to the sense : in other words, ' 
 the mind's preception and feeling of, 
 the matter, must dictate the appropri- 1 
 ate manner : "suit the action to the 
 word, the word to the action ; and | 
 o'er step not the modesty of nature." 
 
 230, "Bowels of compassion, and 
 loins of the mind." In the light of the 
 principles here unfolded, these words 
 are seen to be full of meaning. All the 
 strong affections of the human mind, 
 are manifested thro' the dorsal and ab- 
 dominal region of the body. Let any 
 one look at a boy, when he bids defiance 
 to another boy, and challenges him to 
 combat. "Come on, I am ready for 
 you;" andatthe soldier with his loins 
 girded for battle : also, observe the ef- 
 fect of strong emotions on yourself, on 
 your body, and where ; and you will be 
 able to see the propriety of these words, 
 and the world of meaning they contain. 
 If we were pure minded, we should find 
 the proper study of physiology to be 
 the direct natural road to the mind, and 
 to the presence of the Deity. 
 
 231. Observations. To become a 
 good reader, and a reader at sight, one 
 must always let the eyes precede the 
 voice a number of words ; so that the 
 mind shall have time, clearly, and dis- 
 tinctly, to conceive the ideas to be com- 
 municated ; and also, feel their influ- 
 ence s this will give full play to the 
 thoughts, as well as impart power from 
 the affectuous part of the mind, to the 
 body, for producing the action, and co- 
 operation, of the right muscles and or- 
 gans to manufacture the sounds and 
 words. In walking, it is always best to 
 see where we are about to step ; it is 
 equally so in reading, when the voice 
 walks. Indeed, by practice, a person 
 will be able to take in a line or two, in 
 anticipation of the vocal effort : always 
 look before you step. 
 
 132, In analyzing the skeleton more 
 particularly it is seen to fulfil three 
 grand purposes in reference to the rest 
 of the body. Lit covers and protects 
 certain delicate organs ; as the brains, 
 lungs, and heart : 2. it connects and sus- 
 tains certain parts ; see the spine, or 
 back bone and the lower limbs, like pil- 
 lars sustaining a temple ! 3. the passive 
 organs of locomotion, &c. Look at the 
 arched shape of the cranium, or skull ; 
 
 beauty and utility combined — a splen- 
 did dome, or vault for the mind. 
 
 133. Colds and coughs — are the ef- 
 fects of sudden exposure to a cold at- 
 mosphere, by which the pores of the 
 skin, (which is an exhalent surface,) be- 
 come constringed, and obstructed ; and 
 they are removed, by restoring to the 
 skin, (which is the safety valve of the 
 system,) its usual offices. When one 
 has thus taken cold, the mucus mem- 
 brane of the lungs, and air passages,, 
 (which are also exhalents,) emit a new 
 fluid — to compensate for the interrup- 
 tion in the office of the surface of the 
 body ; and, as this new secretion con- 
 sists of humors, w r hichcan be of no fur- 
 ther use to the system, it excites a mus- 
 cular effort, called a cough, by which it 
 is detached from the surface of this in- 
 ner skin, and expectorated. Bathing 
 and friction are very useful. 
 
 234, Laughing scientifically. The 
 following suggestions are given for the 
 formation of Laughing Glee Clubs, in 
 the hope that this remarkably healthful 
 and anti-melancholy exercise, may aid 
 in accomplishing its very beneficial ef- 
 fect's in old and young, male and female. 
 Let a number of persons, say six, or 
 eight, form a circle, sitting, or standing 
 erectly, with the shoulders thrown back, 
 and the leader commence, by giving one 
 laugh, in the use of the syllable huh ; 
 and then, let the one at his right hand 
 repeat it, which is reiterated by each one 
 till it comes round : then, without any 
 loss of time, let the leader repeat the 
 word, adding another, (huh. huh.) 
 which is to be taken up as before by the 
 club ; and, as it comes to him the third 
 time, let him add another, (huh, huh. 
 huh.) and so on, till there follows a com- 
 plete round of shouts and roars of 
 laughter. 
 
 135, Look at the chest, or thorax ; 
 see the boundaries /before the sternum, 
 or breast bone ; at the sides, the seven 
 true ribs, connected with the sternum, 
 and the five false or short ribs ; (men 
 have just as many as women ;) behind, 
 the spinal column: below, the diaphragm: 
 see how security and protection are ob- 
 tained : also motion in respiration, and 
 power of contraction in producing 
 sounds : also, flexibility— to conform to 
 the movements of the body : and thiuk 
 
 I 
 
32 
 
 <<*f the dreadful effects of tight lacing, on 
 the form and actions of the chest, as 
 well as of sitting in a bent posture : 
 whatever a man soweth, of that shall 
 he reap : Remember our subjects are 
 matter and SPIRIT. 
 
 236. The three philosophical divis* 
 kms of Poetry (as well as Prose) in re- 
 lation to the mind, are— RELIGIOUS, 
 having reference to the supreme Being ; 
 and what is above us in the scale of 
 •creation : the SOCIAL, or middle ; 
 what is around us, and within, relating 
 to the great family of man : and that 
 which refers principally, to the kingdom 
 •of Nature, which is below us ; the an- 
 imal, vegetable, and mineral : (do not 
 include mankind in the animal kingdom; 
 they are human ; it is sensualism which 
 has degraded man to rank with ani- 
 mals.) The common divisions of Poet- 
 ry are Pastoral, Lyric, Didactic, Satire, 
 Sonnets, Descriptive, Epic, Tragic, and 
 Comic : to which some add, Sacred, 
 Classic, Romantic, Elegiac, Mythologic, 
 Eclogue, Ballad, and Epitaph. 
 
 237. Observe the connection, and 
 sustaining power, of the pile of bones 
 called the vertebrae, vertebral column, 
 or spinal column — back-bone ; twenty 
 four bones placed one on another, seven 
 belonging to the neck ; twelve to me 
 back, and five to the loins : notice the 
 pelvis, or basin-like formed bone, on 
 which the spine rests — the base, or 
 foundation, sustainiuglhe viscera ; and 
 see how it is placed on the two pillars— 
 the lower extremities : what a stupen- 
 dous foundation ! fit for so glorious a 
 temple. 
 
 238. Pronunciation, — had a very 
 comprehensive meaning among the an- 
 cients, taking in the whole compass of 
 delivery, and involving every thing 
 which we see and hear in modern elo- 
 cution : it is now confined within nar- 
 rower limits, and has reference only to 
 the manner of sounding words. It is 
 much to be regretted, that there is not 
 more agreement, even among literary 
 and scientific men, with regard to this 
 important branch of our subject: but, 
 when we reflect, that not one in a hun- 
 dred, takes it up systematically, and 
 masters its principles, it is not surprising 
 that there is so much discrepancy. This 
 consideration of inattention to the sub- 
 
 i ject should put us on our guard against 
 following their examples in every re- 
 i spect, and of yielding implicit obedience 
 to their whims and oddities. There is so 
 : much self-love and the pride of intelli- 
 | gence, as well as the passion for novel- 
 ty, prevalent in the world, that the stu- 
 dent in elocution, as well as in every 
 ' thing else, should cleave to acknowledge 
 I ed and self-evident principles. 
 
 239. The Second, or middle degree 
 | of the body, is the muscular, or fleshy 
 
 parts ; some of which are large, others 
 small, according to their uses. The 
 
 1 muscular fibres of the principal volunta- 
 
 ; ry muscles, terminate in finer fibres and 
 possess greater strength, and occupy less 
 space, than those of the fleshy portions 
 of the muscles : thus, the proportions of 
 
 j the whole body, and, particularly, about 
 the joints, are beautifully preserved. A 
 
 ; tendon consists of a bundle of these 
 fibres, some round, fiat, or three-cornered 
 &c : grasp the ankle just above the heel, 
 and you can feel the tendons connected 
 
 | with the muscles, that enable you to 
 drop your toes, or stand on tip-toe : eve- 
 ry fibre of the flesh in the calf termin- 
 
 ', ates in this tendon. 
 
 240. Observations. Have you ever 
 ! noticed, particularly, the reciprocal ac- 
 
 tion between the voice and the mind, the 
 | tongue and the hvarl ? Well might the 
 I apostle exclaim. — "How great a matter 
 j a little fire kindleth !" The tongue is 
 
 full of power for weal, or for wo, accord- 
 j ing to the state of the heart that impels 
 I it to action. What is there that cannot 
 | be talked up ) or talked down by it? It 
 
 | is full Of BLESSING, Or CURSING — LOVE Or 
 
 | hatred ; and oh ! how it can sting the 
 \ soul, when it has been dipped in the gall 
 i and wormwood of hell ; and how lift it 
 
 to heaven, when fired with celestial 
 
 love ! 
 
 241. Tendons — do not stretch, and 
 . contract, as the fleshy parts do ; they 
 
 seem as ropes, to connect certain mus- 
 cles ; some running over pullies, and 
 some having openings like button-holes, 
 thro' which others pass.: see the action 
 of these tendons, after cutting off a 
 chicken's leg, while pulling any of the 
 white chords. Involuntary muscles 
 rarely have tendons, being composed of 
 interwoven fibres, and spreading around 
 some hollow organ, and expelling its 
 
33 
 
 ents. Are analogies seen here be- 
 tween the use of these muscles, and 
 those of certain letters, as manifested 
 in the structure and arrangement of 
 words, &c? 
 
 242* Cause and Effect.— Such are 
 the defects of our education, that we are 
 brought up almost as ignorant of our 
 bodies and minds, as of the man in the 
 moon : the consequence is, we are im- 
 posed upon by the shoemaker, the"tailor, 
 the mantua-maker, the carpenter and 
 joiner, the cabinet maker, the miller and 
 baker; the cook and the washer, and al- 
 most every body else ; we are a race of 
 abusers of one another. When we get 
 a pair of shoes, tHe first question is, how 
 well do they look ? so also of the coat 
 and cress, the h$use, the chair, the 
 flour, and bread, <fcc, &c. Oh when 
 shall we be wise, and understand the 
 things that so nearly concern our tem- 
 poral salvation ? Havmg eyes, we see 
 not right : having ears, we hear wrong; 
 our feelings, taste, and smell betray us, 
 because they are perverted. The ene- 
 my comes in upon us like a flood, and 
 who will lift up a standard against him ? 
 243* The third, and inmost degree 
 of the body, is the Nervous System, 
 which is the medium of communication 
 between the bones and muscles, and the 
 mind, informing us of their respective 
 ■conditions. The nerves are composed 
 of two substances, the cinerieious and 
 medullary matter ; the former is of a 
 reddish color, the latter pearly white: the 
 brain consists of both : the cinericious, 
 or cortical substance, on the outer sur- 
 face, and the medullary constituting the 
 central portion. The brain and semilu- 
 nar ganglion, or great solar plexus, are 
 
 1 nervous centres : thro' which all the 
 fibres descend from the brain, thro' the 
 neck, into the body, and none ascend; 
 and where the fibres are in their first 
 principles, there is life in its first prin- 
 
 ' ciples : hence, we infer that the brain is 
 
 ! the seat of the mind. 
 
 244, Telling Stories. — Who has 
 
 . not observed the intense interest mani- 
 fested by children in hearing one anoth- 
 er tell stories ? They will sit up till mid- 
 
 , night without being sleepy ; and are 
 
 : general]}- driven to their homes, or to 
 \heir bed. How readily they remem- 
 ber, and relate their interesting stories ! 
 
 to their companions, days, weeks, 
 months, and even years, after first heav- 
 ing them ; the reason is, they not only 
 see and understand these simple tale.-, 
 but feel them intensely ; and hence, they 
 easily get them by heart, as it is called. 
 Why have not teachers long since tak- 
 en a hint of the mode, in which to com- 
 municate all the varieties of scientific, 
 and useful knowledge to their pupils ? 
 Let them take turns in telling stories 
 after their teachers, and if their exercis- 
 es are judiciously managed, as they may 
 be, they will be found exceedingly amus- 
 ing, and very promotive of a rapid de- 
 velopement of mind. 
 
 245, A serve is a collection of fibres, 
 like a thread of silk. " We have nerves 
 of Organic life, and nerves of Animal 
 life : The first are found among the 
 great organs, such as the heart, lungs, 
 stomach, intestines, &c., and their mi- 
 nute branches irregularly pervade the 
 whole body ; they are the mediums of 
 regulating every part : the second are 
 very regular, and are ranged in corres- 
 ponding pairs, on opposite sides of the 
 whole body. These two sets of nerves 
 are connected by the great Sympathetic 
 nerve,which binds into one all the nerves; 
 thus bestowing unity and individuality 
 upon the whole, and enabling the mind 
 to be every where present in its body. 
 
 246. A Dandy of some use. — Let 
 the pupil impress on his mind the ab- 
 solute necessity, for awhile, of keeping 
 his shoulders thrown back, so as to make 
 the breast as round and prominent as 
 possible : and then, after a few days or 
 weeks at farthest, he will feel very un- 
 comfortable to sit, stand, or labor, in a 
 bent position. But says one. " I should 
 look so much like a dandy.'' Never 
 mind that, provided it be right ; and if 
 you can make this much use of so su- 
 perfluous an article, it may serve to 
 show you. that nothing exists in vain : 
 think of the wisdom and industry of the 
 BEE. 
 
 24T. Let us take a retrospective 
 glance at what has been said about the 
 three discrete degrees of body. viz. tl e 
 forms and uses of the bones, the mus- 
 cles, and nerves, and their respective 
 essentials ; all of which, with their con- 
 tents, constitute the external of what 
 the ancients called a microcosm, or Jit- 
 
34 
 
 tie world. But what were this world 
 without a Sun to impart to it light and 
 heat ? Of what use the body without its 
 soul ? Of what use the house, without 
 the inhabitant ? and of what use is words, 
 without thought and feeling? And of 
 what use are all these, if they cannot 
 be made manifest? The body is the 
 mind's servant, and depends on its care, 
 as the mind itself does on the Father of 
 mind. Body and soul are best taken 
 care of when both are minded together. 
 
 248. The cultivation, and frequent 
 practice of music in schools of every 
 grade, will have a strong, and decidedly 
 beneficial influence on the habits of the 
 pupils. By using the same words, and 
 singing the same pieces together, their 
 thoughts are directed in the same course, 
 and their affections are elevated togeth- 
 er, and they will naturally be led into 
 closer association and sympathy with 
 each other. Well chosen music may 
 be made an efficient auxiliary, guiding 
 and controlling the feelings and actions 
 in the school room, and contribute es- 
 sentially, to the proper management of 
 its concerns. 
 
 249. Again, each part, member, or- 
 gan, viscus, membrane, and faculty of 
 the body, corresponds to, and so signi- 
 iies, a particular part, faculty or princi- 
 ple of the spirit, or mind: and all the 
 body, taken together, represents the 
 whole mind: the reason of which is, 
 that the soul is the primary cause, the 
 active power, or living interior agent, 
 according to which, and for the use of 
 which, the body was formed, as a me- 
 dium or organ of the soul's operations 
 in the natural world. Hence, the body 
 being such, it necessarily is an effigy, 
 or type, and, as it were the clothing, or 
 investing organism of that soul, spirit, or 
 mind. Here is a ladder from earth to 
 mind, and from mind to heaven : let us 
 ascend, aud view the prospect. 
 
 250. Emphasis— is an increase of 
 aecent on the accented vowels of im- 
 portant words, to distinguish them from 
 others, comparatively unimportant. — 
 There are two ways of making it, the 
 same as in accent j viz : by stress and 
 quantity: but as many ways of exhib- 
 »>«to£ ii. } as there are pitches, qualities, 
 an 4 *»flKU flections of voice ; all of which 
 are very simple; and a knowledge of 
 
 them easily acquired by the persevering 
 student. Words are emphatic, when 
 opposition is expressed or understood j 
 or when we wish to enforce the ideas, 
 so as to produce their desired effect. 
 
 251. Rule. Emphasize the signi- 
 ficant word, or words, with such a de- 
 gree and kind of stress, or expulsive 
 prolongation of sound, as to convey the 
 entire sense and feeling in the best man- 
 ner, and give each idea its relative im- 
 portance. Ex. and definition : u E?n- 
 phasis is che index of my meaning, and 
 shows more exactly, what I wish the 
 hearers to attend to particularly." In. 
 deed, it is to the mind what the finger 
 is to the eye ; when w r e wish a person 
 to see any thing, we naturally point to 
 it : thus, are the matiifestations of the 
 mind made by the emphasis, or point- 
 ing of the voice. 
 
 252. Application. It is incredible, 
 how much maybe accomplished by dili- 
 gence and industry. The present state 
 of the world, enlightened by the arts 
 and sciences, is a living proof, that diffi- 
 culties seemingly insuperable, may be 
 overcome. This consideration ought to 
 stimulate us to industry and application. 
 We do not know our own strength, till 
 we try it , nor to what extent our abili- 
 ties will carry us, till we put them to t he- 
 test. Those who want resolution, often 
 desist from useful enterprises, when 
 the)' have more than half effected their 
 purposes : they are discouraged by diffi- 
 culties and disappointments, which 
 ought rather to excite their ardor, and 
 redouble the vigor of their efforts to suc- 
 ceed. 
 
 253. The term system is generally 
 applied to a collection of organs possess- 
 ing the same, or similar structure. 
 Thus, we speak of the nervous system, 
 which consists of a great variety tof or- 
 gans, differing in shape, size, and loca- 
 tion, yet agreeing together in having 
 one common structure. The same may 
 be said of the muscular system : and 
 both consist of filaments, which are the 
 elementary animal solids, and make 
 fibres and tissues, called muscular and 
 veinous fibres, or tissues. Different tis- 
 sues, so arranged as to form a distinct 
 piece of animal mechanism, and perform 
 a specific office, constitute an organ ; 
 several of which, associated together to 
 
35 
 
 accomplish a common object, is called 
 an apparatus. 
 
 254. Examples of Emphasis by 
 stress. — 1. It is not so easy to hide our 
 faults, as to confess and avoid them. 2. 
 
 in the back-gvoxxnd, and bringing out the 
 strong ones into the /o/e-ground. Now 
 if the little words that are insignificant, 
 are, in their pronunciation and delivery, 
 made significant, the proper effect will 
 
 Never attempt to raise yourself, by de- ( be destroyed. Therefore, we should 
 predating the merits of others. 3. As i never make prominent the above words 
 
 fools, make a mock at sin, so do the ig- 
 norant, often make a mock at knorvledge. 
 4. They are generally most ridiculous 
 
 when unemphatic. 
 
 257. Emphasis. — 1. By expulsive 
 stress. Exs. 1. He who cannot bear a 
 
 themselves, who see most to ridicule in j joke should never give one. 2. Avoid a 
 others. 5. "Wherever education is neg- ! slanderer, as you would a scorpion. 3. A 
 lected, depravity, and every kind of ac- j wager, is & fool 's argument. 4. He that 
 
 tion that degrades mankind, are most 
 frequent. 6. The first three volumes 5 
 not the three first volumes ; there is only 
 one first. 7. The first three, and the Inst 
 two verses ; not the three first and two 
 last. 8. To be truly happy, man must 
 be good, and renounce such enjoyments 
 as are grounded in the love of evil. 9. 
 There is a natural body, and there is a 
 spiritual body. 10. Flesh and blood can- 
 not inherit the kingdom of God." 
 
 255. Our food passes through six 
 changes, or states, before it becomes ar- 
 terial blood, fit to sustain the body: 1. 
 it is masticated in the mouth, where it 
 
 is past shame, is past hope. 5. What is 
 worth doing at all, is worth doing well. 
 6. Men of principle, ought to be princi- 
 pal men. 7. Aim at nothing higher, 
 till you can read and speak, deliberately, 
 clearly, and distinctly, and with proper 
 emphasis : all other graces will follow. 
 8. The head, without the heart, is like a 
 steam engine, without % boiler. 9. As 
 love, thinks no evil, so envy, speaks no 
 good. 10. Variety, delights ; and per- 
 jection, delights in variety. 
 
 258. Opening the mouth. This is 
 among the most important duties of the 
 elocutionist, and singer; more fail ir 
 
 is (or should be) mixed with the saliva, this particular, than in any other : in- 
 and where the process of digestion com- distinctness and stammering are the sad 
 
 mences : 2. in the stomach the gastric 
 juice changes it into chyme : 3. in the 
 intestines into chyle, (except the use- 
 less parts ;) 4. it is then taken up by 
 the absorbents, and, in passing into the 
 lacteals and lymphatic glands, the nox- 
 ious parts are separated, and a further 
 assimilation produced: 5. the absor- 
 bents convey it to the thoracic duct, 
 which empties it into the subclavian veins, 
 and, bejore and after, it reaches the right 
 auricle of the heart, the blood, (return- 
 ing from each part of the body,) joins 
 it, when another change takes place : 6. 
 it'then passes through the right ventricle 
 into the lungs to receive its last change, 
 by becoming arterialized ; when it is 
 returned through the left auricle into 
 the ventricle,and, after being made alike, 
 sent the messenger of health, and sup- 
 port to every part of the system. 
 
 256. Strong Points. There are in 
 all kinds of sentences, paragraphs, 
 speeches, &c, what may be called 
 strong points, which are to be shown, 
 principally, by the voice : hence, the 
 importance of throwing all weak parts 
 
 effects of not opening the mouth wide 
 enough. Let it be your first object to 
 attend to the proper positions of the vo- 
 cal organs * for which purpose, practice 
 the vocal analysis as here presented. 
 The \ first effort is separating the lips and 
 ' teeth ; which will not only enable you 
 to inhale and exhale freely, through the 
 mouth, when speaking and singing, but 
 to avoid uneasiness in the chest, and 
 an unpleasant distortion of the features, 
 The second is, a simultaneous action of 
 the lips, teeth, and tongue : let these re- 
 marks be indelibly stamped upon your 
 memory : for they are of immense prae 
 tical importance. 
 
 259. As the blood goes out in the 
 arteries, and comes back, in the veins, 
 they are of course connected at their 
 extremities, or little ends, by exceedicg- 
 ly small tubes, finer than hairs : and 
 hence, they are called capillary blood ves- 
 sels : this affords some idea of what i» 
 meat by the circulation of the blocxt. 
 The fine partsof the blood become bonk, 
 the finer parts muscle, and the finest 
 nkkve. The life i& in the blood ; 1. c. 
 
36 
 
 the blood is the medium through which 
 life, from above, flows into the body: af- 
 fection also is in speech in a similar 
 manner. 
 
 260. EMPHASIS.— 2. by stress and 
 higher pitch : that is, force and loud- 
 ness of voice, and elevation to the upper 
 notes of the scale. Exs. 1. Little minds 
 are tamed and subdued by misfortunes ; 
 but great ones rise above them. 2. 
 Virtue — leads to happiness ; vice — to 
 misery . 3. True liberty, can exist only 
 where justice is impartially administered. 
 4. Tyranny, is detestable in every shape ; 
 but in none so formidable, as when as- 
 sumed and exercised, by a number of ty- 
 rants. 5. Frown, indignantly, upon 
 the first dawning— of an attempt, to 
 alienate any portion of this anion from 
 the rest : the Union-— it must be preserv- 
 ed. Note : if portion is made emphatic, 
 any must be frcemphatic! 6. Drun- 
 kenness — destroys more of the human 
 race, and alienates more property, than 
 all the other crimes on earth. 7. A day, 
 an hour — of virtuous Ubtrty, is worth a 
 whole eternity, in bondage. 
 
 261. Position in Bed. There is no 
 doubt, that the habit of forming round 
 or hump'd shoulders, (which is rarely, 
 if ever natural,) is contracted in infan- 
 cy, and childhood. The incautious 
 mother, not understanding the princi- 
 ples of physiology, lays the infant on a 
 pillow of feathers, instead of on a good 
 mattrass, or straw bed, without pillows j 
 thus elevating the head far too much 
 above the level of the body ; and this 
 practice is continued in after life, very 
 much to the detriment of health, and 
 beauty of form. If necessary, raise the 
 head posts of the bed two or three inch- 
 es, instead of using high pillows. 
 
 262. Important Considerations. — 
 If the evils of tight lacing, and tight 
 dressing would only stop with the guilty, 
 one consolation would still be left us ; 
 but even this is denied us : no ! there is 
 not even one drop of joy to be cast into 
 our cup of bitterness— the draught is 
 one of unmingled gall: the human 
 form divine is sadly deformed, the foun- 
 tain of innumerable evils and diseases 
 is opened up by this abominable prac- 
 tice, and thousands of human beings are 
 yearly coming into life, cursed from 
 head to foot, from mind to body, with 
 
 the awful effects of this infernal fashion , 
 which originated in the basest of pas* 
 sions. Oh, who can measure the ac- 
 cumalating woe which this accursed 
 custom has entailed, and is yet entail- 
 ing, on the human race. 
 
 263. For the growth and sustenance 
 of the body, blood is carried from the 
 heart, through the arteries, to all the 
 parts, and returned to the heart thro' the 
 veins ; the former constitute the arterial 
 system, and the latter, the veinous sys- 
 tem. See the engravings, representing 
 them. These blood vessels, or tubes, 
 are very numerous, and branch off in 
 different directions j they are furnished 
 with valves, like pumps, so that the blood 
 can flow only one way : the beatings ot 
 the heart are produced by a muscular 
 contraction, pumping the blood through 
 the arteries, analogous to the fire engine, 
 or common pump. 
 
 264. EMPHASIS.— 3. by quantity; 
 or prolongation of sound on different 
 pitches. Exs. 1. " Roll on, thou dark 
 and deep blue ocean — roll ! Ten thousand 
 fleets sweep over thee in vain. 2. Hail — 
 universal Lord! be bounteous still — to 
 give us only good ; and if the night — 
 have gathered — aught of evil, or conceal- 
 ed, — disperse it now, as light — dispels the 
 dark. 3. Let our object be — our coun- 
 try; our WHOLE country ; and nothing 
 BUT our country. 4. A Deity — believ- 
 ed, is joy — begun ; a Deity adored— is 
 joy— advanced : a Deity beloved — is joy 
 matured. Prayer ardent— opens Heav- 
 en ; lets down a stream of glory, on the 
 consecrated hour of man, in audience 
 with the Deity. 
 
 265. Sheridan, of whose oratorical 
 powers every elocutionist has heard, af- 
 ter having excited a great interest among 
 his friends, who were filled with hope at 
 his prospects, made a signal failure on 
 his first appearance in Parliament ; in- 
 somuch, that he was entreated never to 
 make another attempt: he nobly re- 
 plied — " I will ; for by Heaven, it is in 
 me, and it shall come out of me." He 
 did try, and his efforts were crowned- 
 with success. In like manner almost 
 every orator has failed at first, but per- 
 severance made them more than con- 
 querors. It is not unfrequent that the 
 most abashed, and ill-omened, succeed 
 
 | the best. Take courage ; let your motto 
 
37 
 
 be " onward, ar# upward, and true to 
 the line." 
 
 266. Observations. The only way 
 in which children or adults can be taught 
 to read or speak naturally, is — to mem- 
 orize short or longer sentences, and 
 talk them off in a perfectly intelligent 
 and unrestrained manner. In com- 
 mencing with Abcdarians, first teach 
 them the sounds of the vowels ; then of 
 the consonants, interspersing the exer- 
 cises with select or original sentences. 
 Ex. " Time and tide wait for no man." 
 Or, if it is a rainy day, " This is a very 
 rainy day." If pleasant, (i this is a de- 
 lightful day." Which sentences, after 
 being talked, in concert, can be spoken 
 round by the class individually. In this 
 way, even small children may be taught 
 a great variety of things natural and 
 spiritual ; and an immense field of use- 
 fulness opened before the mind of the 
 real teacher : i. e. one who teaches from 
 the love of teaching; and no others 
 should engage in it. 
 
 267. Dwell on such words as are ex- 
 pressive of the kindlier affections, with 
 a slow and adhesive movement of voice, 
 as you part with the ideas reluctantly. 
 Very deliberate subjects require more 
 or less of quantity in their emphasis : 
 so also do the sublime, grand, and solemn 
 ones ; particularly, the reverential, grave 
 earnest entreaty, prayer, deep pathos, 
 &c. Exs. "Join — all ye creatures — 
 to extol — Him — first ; Him — last : Him 
 — midst; and — without e?id." u O Mary ! 
 dear — departed shade, where is thy place 
 of blissful rest?'' 1 
 
 268. The upper, or third story, may 
 be contemplated in three divisions : viz : 
 1. The head proper : 2. from the root of 
 the nose to the nape of the neck, includ- 
 ing some of the forehead : 3. the face 
 and the neck : fifty five bones entering 
 into their composition, including the 
 thirty two teeth: the middle or second 
 story of three apartments, — (1. the 
 thorax, containing the heart and lungs, 
 and great blood vessels ; 2. the liver 
 and stomach; and 3, the intestines &c :) 
 the lower or first story is a foundation, 
 of three divisions ; viz : 1. the thigh 
 bones; and 2. the shins, joined at the 
 knee and ankle ; the feet ; the same of 
 the arms : 1st. from the shoulders to 
 
 w : 2d. from thence to the wrist : 
 
 3d. the hand : the fingers and toes have 
 each three divisions ; which see. 
 
 269. EMPHASIS.— 4. By prolonga- 
 tion, and depressed monotone : that is, 
 quantity of voice on the first, second, 
 or third note : it is sometimes used in 
 the grave and sublime, and produces 
 astonishing effects. Monotony— occurs 
 when the voice is inflected neither up, 
 nor down ; but it is confined to a few 
 words. The figures refer to the notes 
 of the diatonic scale. The following 
 free translation of a paragraph from 
 one of Cicero's Orations, will serve as a 
 good illustration : bat no one should at- 
 tempt it, without committing it to mem- 
 ory. 
 
 2T0. (Pitch : Note 4.) " I appeal to 
 you — ye hills, and groves, of (5) Alba, 
 and your demolished (6) altars! I call 
 you to (8) witness ! (4) whether your (o) 
 altars, your (6) divinities, your (8) pow- 
 ers ! (5) which Clodius had polluted 
 with all kinds of (6) wickedness, (o) did 
 not (4) avenge themselves, when this 
 wretch was (3) extirpated. (1) And • 
 thou, holy (2) Jupiter ! (3) from the 
 (4) height of this (5) sacred (6) mount, 
 whose lakes — and groves — he had so of- 
 ten (3) contaminated." 
 
 271. Observations. Such is the 
 careless and ignorant manner in which 
 many have been permitted to come up, 
 instead of being brought up, that it will 
 often be found necessary to use a varie- 
 ty of means to become divested of bad 
 habits and their consequences. Proba- 
 bly the lungs suffer more than any other 
 part of the body, by being cooped up in 
 a small cavity : to enlarge the chest, 
 side-wise, let us practice the elevation of 
 our elbows to a horizontal plane nearly 
 level with the shoulders, and commence 
 gently tapping the breast between the 
 shoulders, the ends of the fingers of both 
 hands being nearly together ; and then, 
 during the exercise, strike back from the 
 sternum toward each shoulder, drawing 
 the hands farther and farther apart, till 
 the ends of the fingers reach the arm 
 pits, and even out on the arm: try it, 
 and you will seeand know. 
 
 272. Intonations. The intonations 
 are opposite to monotones, and mean the 
 rise and tall of the voice, in its natural 
 movements through a sentence :♦ they 
 are demonstrated in music, and here, in 
 
38 
 
 elocution. In all common kinds of read- 
 ing and speaking, the voice should not 
 generally rise and fall more than one 
 note, in its passage from syllable to syl- 
 lable, and from word to word : its move- 
 ment will then be gentle, easy and flow- 
 ing. But when the passion, or senti- 
 ment to be exhibited, is powerfully 
 awakening or exciting, it may rise or 
 fall several notes, according to the pre- 
 dominance of feeling. 
 
 273. Personified view of Circula- 
 tion. The blood consists of very small 
 globules, or little balls, unperceivable to 
 the natural eye : let them be considered 
 as labourers ; of which there is an im- 
 mense number : the body is the world 
 containing a great many forests, farms, 
 towns and cities : a commercial world : 
 a farming world ; a mechanical world ; 
 in which all kinds of business are carried 
 on : especially that of building up and 
 improving. The. food is the building 
 material, which passes through a va- 
 riety of hands, and receives its finishing 
 • touches in the lungs. Each globule of 
 blood is a work-hand, which goes from 
 the heart to the lungs for his load, and 
 returns to the heart, and is thence sent 
 in the arterial road to dispose of his bur- 
 den where it is needed, and, on his re- 
 turn, gathers up all the rubbish, that he 
 is # capable of managing, and returns it 
 thorough the heart to the lungs, where he 
 disposes of it, and then retraces his steps, 
 and performs his accustomed labours : 
 this is done every three or four minutes. 
 The blood goes out in the arteries, pass- 
 es into the capillaries, which appropriate 
 the nourishment, and hand the rest over 
 to the veins. 
 
 1 274. Never begin, or end, two succes- 
 sive sentences on the same pitch ; neith- 
 er two lines in poetry; nor two mem- 
 bers of a sentence ; nor two words mean- 
 ing different things ; if you do, it will be 
 monotonous. The 3d, 4th, or 5th note 
 is the proper pitch for commencing to 
 read or speak ; the force must be de- 
 termined by the occasion, size of the 
 room, the sense, &c. If we are in the 
 middle of the pitches, we can rise or fall 
 according to circumstances ; but if we 
 begin too high, or too low, we shall be 
 liable to extremes. Look at those of 
 the audience at a medium distance, and 
 you will not greatly err in pitch. 
 
 275. Emphasis— 5.%y a rhetoric- 
 al pause before or after, the emphat- 
 ic words ; which may be elevated, or de- 
 pressed with quantity or J one, as the sen- 
 timent requires. This pause, when 
 made before the important word or words, 
 causes the mind to revert to what was 
 last said. This and the- preceding, are 
 closely connected, and might, perhaps, 
 have been included under one head. 
 Examples. "And (5) now abideth 
 faith, hope, charity ; these three ; but 
 the greatest of these is— charity. (5) 
 Charity suffereth long, and is (3) kind: 
 
 (4) charity — envieth not ; (5) charity 
 vaunleth not itself ; (3) is not puffed up; 
 doth not behave itself (5) unseemly ; 
 (6) seeketh not her own ; (5) is not ea- 
 sily (4) provoked ; (3) thinketh no evil ; 
 
 (5) rejoiceth not in (4) iniquity ; but 
 (o)rejoicethin the truth ; (4) beareth 
 all things ; (5) believeth all things, (6) 
 hoptth all things ; (7) endureth all 
 things ; (6) charity— (8) never fail- 
 eth." 
 
 276. Observations. There are three 
 different modes in which one may read 
 and speak ; only two of which, under 
 any circumstances, can be right. The 
 first is reading and speaking by word, 
 without having any regard to the senti- 
 ment ; the second is reading or speaking 
 by word and thought only ; and the 
 third is reading and speaking by word, 
 thought and feeling all combined, and 
 appropriately mani f ested . In the Greek 
 language, for example, we find these 
 three modes ( definitely marked by spe- 
 cific words : such as lalleo, eipo and 
 EIRO. Children are usually taught 
 theirs*, instead of the third, and then 
 the second and third combined : hence, 
 very few of them ever have any concep- 
 tion of the meaning of the words they, 
 use, or the subject matter about which 
 they are reading ; they seem to regard 
 these as something foreign to the object. 
 Here we see again the natural truth of 
 another scripture declaration. The let- 
 ter killeth ; the spirit giveth life. 
 
 277. In aiming at a compliance with 
 the rules and principles here laid down, 
 great care should be taken ho avoid a 
 stiff and formal mode of reading and 
 speaking. We must never become en- 
 slaved to thought alone, but yield to 
 feeling when feeling is to predominate 
 
39 
 
 Look at the flowers of the field, and of 
 the forest, in all the freedom and grace- 
 fulness of nature : let us be as much 
 like them as possible, in externals, and 
 internally ', free and rational human be- 
 ings; nature and reason combined — man. 
 "From my soul I abhor all affecta- 
 tion." Be natural, rather than mechani- 
 cally correct. 
 
 278. Emphasis— by a pause just 
 before, or after, the important word. 
 The pause before — awakens curiosity, 
 and excites expectation ; after — rolls 
 back the mind to what was last said. 
 How would a tyrant, after having ruled 
 with a rod of iron, and shown compas- 
 sion to none, speak of his own death, in 
 allusion to the setting sun, in the trop- 
 ical climate, where the sun is severely 
 hot as long as it shines, and when it 
 sets, it is very soon dark. [5] "And 
 now my race of terror run, [6] Mine 
 be the ave of tropic [6] sun ; No pale [6] 
 gradations quench his ray. [5] No twi- 
 light [7] dews his wrath allay : ]4] With 
 [5] disk, (like battle target) red, [6] He 
 rushes V his burning bed, [o] Dies the 
 wide wave with bloody [6] light ; Then 
 sinks — (at once) — [2] and all is night." 
 The last clause, pronounced in a deep 
 monotone, and a pause before it, adds 
 much to its beauty and grandeur. — 
 "Will all great Neptune's ocean-wash this 
 blood — dean — from my hands ? No : 
 these, my hands, will rather the multitu- 
 dinous ' sea incarnadine : making the 
 green — [1] one red." i. e. Macbeth's 
 hands are so deeply stained, that, to 
 wash them in the ocean, would make it 
 red with blood. 
 
 279. EMPHASIS— 6. By changing 
 the seat of accent. Examples. 1. 
 What is done, cannot be undone. 2. If 
 he did not do it directly, he did it ^di- 
 rectly. 2. There are probably as many 
 invisible as visible things. 3. Did he act 
 honestly, or dishonestly ? 4. There is a 
 difference between £wing,and forgiving. 
 5. Does he speak distinctly) or ^distinct- 
 ly. 6. Better be wwtaught than ill- taught; 
 and better be alone, than in bad company. 
 9. He that ascended, is the same as he 
 that descended. 10. Pure religion rais- 
 es men above themselves ; ?Vreligion 
 sinks them to the brute. 11. Si»n7itude 
 ioins ; dissimilitude separates. 
 
 280. Dyspepsia. Many persons of 
 
 the present day do not chew their iboc!y 
 like a man, but bolt it whole, like a 
 boa-constrictor : they neither take the 
 trouble to dissect, nor time to masticate. 
 It is no wonder they lose their teeth, 
 for they rarely use them ; and their di- 
 gestion, for they overload it ; and. 
 their saliva, for they expend it on their 
 carpets, or floors, instead of their food. 
 They load their stomach as a truckman 
 his cart, as full as it will hold, and as 
 fast as they can pitch it in with a scooo 
 shovel, and drive off; and then complain 
 that their load is too heavy. 
 
 281. 1. Does he pronounce correctly, 
 or ^correctly? 2. In some kinds of com- 
 position, — 'plausibility is deemed as es- 
 sential as probability. 3. Does that man 
 speak rationally, or ^/rationally ? 4. 
 We are not now to enquire into the jus- 
 tice, or the ^justice, the honor, or the 
 dishonor, of the deed ; nor whether it 
 was lawful or tmlawful, wise, or ?mwise; 
 but, whether it was actually committed. 
 5. He who is good before in visible wit- 
 nesses, is eminently so before visible 
 ones. 6. This corn/ptible must put on 
 iNcorruption, and this mortal ramortali- 
 ty. 7. What fellowship hath righteous- 
 ness, with uNrighteousness ? or, what 
 communion hath light with darkness ? 
 
 282. Some of the Characteristics 
 of MAN. His position is naturally up- 
 right ; this is evident from the structure 
 of his body : he has free use of both of 
 his hands : hence, he is called the only 
 /wo-handed animal : the prominence of 
 his chin : the uniform length of his 
 teeth are peculiar : he is physically de- 
 fenceless, having neither weapon of at- 
 tack, or defence : his facial angle is 
 greater than that of any other animal ; 
 being from 70° to 90° : he has generally 
 the largest brains ; he is the only ani- 
 mal that sleeps on his back ; the only 
 one that laughs and weeps : the only one 
 that has an articulate language, expres- 
 sive of ideas : and he is the only one en- 
 dued with reason, and moral sense, and 
 a capacity for religion ; the only being 
 capable of serving God. 
 
 283. Varieties. 1. In your conver- 
 sation, be cautious what you speak, to 
 whom you speak, how you speak, when 
 you speak ; and what you speak, speak 
 wisely and truly. 2. A fool's heart is in 
 his tongue ; but a wise man's tongue is 
 
40 
 
 in his heart. 3. Few things engage the 
 attention and affections ' of men more 
 than a handsome address, and a grace- 
 ful conversation. 4. For one great genius, 
 who has written a little book, we have 
 a thousand little geniuses, who have 
 written great books. 5. Words are but 
 air ; and both are capable of much con- 
 densation. 6. Nature seldom inspires a 
 strong desire for any object, without fur- 
 nishing the ability to at tain it. 7. All is 
 not gold that gutters. 
 
 284. SHOUTING, or High and Loud 
 — implying force of utterance. The last 
 words of Marmion afford excellent 
 means, when memorized, for the stu- 
 dent to try the compass of his voice up- 
 wards, as well as its power on high pitch- 
 es. It is not often that these high and 
 almost screaming notes, are required in 
 public speaking : yet there are times, 
 especially in the open air, when they 
 may be introduced with great effect. 
 And it is always well to have an inex- 
 haustible capital of voice, as of money ; 
 indeed, there is no danger of having too 
 much of either, provided we make a pro- 
 per use of them. In giving the word of 
 command, on occasions of fire, erecting 
 buildings, on the field of battle, martial 
 exercise, &c. power and compass of voice 
 are very desirable. 
 
 285. 1. "The war, that for a space 
 did fail, Now, trebly thundering, swell'd 
 the gale, And (10) "Stanley !" (6) was 
 the cry : A light on Marmion'' s visage 
 spread, and fired his glazing eye : With 
 dying hand, above his head, he 
 shook the fragment of his blade, and 
 shouted (8) "VICTORY!" (9) Charge! 
 Chester, (10) charge ! On, STAN- 
 LEY— (12) ON!" 3 Were the last 
 words of Marmion. 2. (6) Liberty! 
 (3) FREEDOM ! (5) Tyranny is dead ! 
 (6) Run (7) hence ! proclaim it about 
 the streets ! — 3. (6) Strike ! till the 
 last armed foe expires ! (7) Strike ! for 
 your altars and your (8) fires ! (9) 
 STRIKE ! for the green graves of your 
 SIRES. (7) GOD ! and your native 
 land. 3. The combat deepens ! (8) on 
 ye brave ! &c, 
 
 286. Mouthing. Some think that 
 words are rendered more distinct, to 
 large assemblies, by dwelling longer on 
 the syllables ; others, that it adds to the 
 pomp and solemnity of p%Jic declama- 
 
 tion, in which t'hey think every thing 
 must be different from private dis- 
 course. This is one of the vices of the 
 stage, and is called theatrical, in op- 
 position to what is natural. By "trip- 
 pingly on the tongue," Shakspeare 
 probably means the bounding of the 
 voice from accent to accent ; trippingly 
 along from word to word without rest- 
 ing on syllables by the way. And by 
 "mouthing," he is thought to mean, 
 dwelling on syllables that have no ac- 
 cent, and ought therefore to be pro- 
 nounced as quickly as is consistent 
 with a proper enunciation. Beware 
 of an artificial air, and hold, as it were, 
 the mirror up to nature. See the dif- 
 ference in the folio wing,Vjr pronouncing 
 them with the accent, extending thro' 
 the whole word, in a drawling tone, 
 and then, giving them right : con-jec- 
 ure, en-croach-ment, hap-pi-ness, grat- 
 i-tude, for-tn-nate-ly ; which is very far 
 from true solemnity, which is in the 
 spirit, not alone in the manner. 
 
 287. INFLECTIONS. 1. These are 
 the rising and falling slides of the 
 voice, terminating on a higher, or lower 
 pitch, than that on which it commenced; 
 being continuous from the radical, or 
 opening fulness of voice, to the vanish 
 or terminating point ; and not discrete, 
 as the seven notes are. In the intona- 
 tions the voice steps up or down, by dis- 
 crete degrees ; but in the inflections it 
 glides up or down, by continuous de- 
 grees. Note. The Piano, Organ, &c. 
 give discrete degrees ; the harp, violin, 
 6cc. continuous degrees. 
 
 288. Observations. The purposes 
 of reading are three : the acquisition of 
 knowledge, assisting the memory in 
 treasuring it up, and the communica- 
 tion of it to others : hence, we see the 
 necessity of reading aloud. The an- 
 cient Greeks never read in public, but 
 recited from memory ; 'of course, if wt 
 wish to succeed as they did, we must 
 follow in their footsteps. How much 
 better it would be, if clergymen would 
 memorize those portions of the Bible, 
 which they wish to read in public ! But 
 it may be said, that the task would be a 
 very severe one : true, but how much 
 more effect might be produced on them- 
 selves and others : and then, to have a 
 
 I large part; or the whole, of that blessed 
 
41 
 
 book, stored up in the mind, for use here 
 and hereafter ! 
 
 289. The inflections may perhaps 
 be better understood by contrasting 
 them with the monotone • which is 
 nearly one continued sound,* without 
 elevation or depression, and may be 
 represented by a strait horizontal line, 
 thus : ___ . In the use of the 
 inflections, the voice departs from the 
 monotone, and its radical, in a continued 
 elevation or depression, two. three, five, 
 or eight notes, according to the intensity 
 of the affirmation, interrogation,; com- 
 mand, petition, or negation ; which are 
 the five distinctive attributes of the vi- 
 tal parts of speech. 
 
 290. On examining children in an 
 unperverted state, and all animals, it 
 will invariably be found that they use 
 the lower muscles for breathing, and 
 producing sounds. "Who is not aware 
 that children will halloo all day long, 
 without becoming hoarse or exhausted. 
 And how often it is the case, that pa- 
 rents wish their children to call persons 
 at a distance, being aware that they 
 themselves have lost the power to speak 
 as formerly. Now all that is necessa- 
 ry to be done, by such individuals, is 
 to retrace their steps to truth and na- 
 ture. 
 
 291. The rising inflection ' This 
 indicates that the voice glides upward 
 continuously, on the more important 
 words. Examples. Do you say that V 
 can learn to sing ? Are you going to 
 town to-day ? Is he a good man ? Do 
 you love and practice the truth ? Is it 
 your desire to become useful ? Are 
 you desirous ofbecomingagood reader, 
 speaker, and singer? Is there not a 
 difference between words, thoughts, and 
 feelings ? ' ' 
 
 292. Do not the bees, (says Quintil- 
 lian) extract honey from very different 
 flowers and juices ? Is there any won- 
 der that Eloquence (which is" one of the 
 greatest gifts heaven has given to 
 man.) requires many aits to perfect it ? 
 and tho' they do not appear in an ora- 
 tion, or seem to be of any use, they nev- 
 ertheless afford an inward supply of 
 strength, ami are silently felt in' the 
 mind : without all these a man may be 
 eloquent, but I wish to form an orator ; 
 
 none can be said to have all the re- 
 
 quisites, while the smallest thing is 
 wanting. 
 
 293. Invalids — will find the princi- 
 ples and practice, here set forth, of r i> 
 service to them, if they possess the 
 strength, and have the resolution, to a- 
 dopt them ; and often they will derive 
 special aid by attempting to do somer 
 thing : for the mind, by a determinatioi 
 of the will, can be brought to act upon 
 the nervous system, in such a way as 
 to start the flow of the blood on its ca- 
 reei of health and strength, and, ere 
 they are aware, they will be ready i< 
 mount up as with the wings of an ea- 
 gle, and leave all care, and trouble, and 
 anxiety on the earth. Let them try it. 
 and they will see : persevere. 
 
 294. THE FALLING EsFLEC- 
 TIO^' (\) This indicates that the voice 
 glides downwards, continuously, on the 
 more important words. " "Where are 
 you going ? Of what are you t hulking* 
 Who sendeth the early, and the latter 
 rain ? What things are most proper for 
 youth to learn ? Those that they are to 
 practice, when they enter upon the stage 
 of action. Be always sure you are 
 right, then go ahead. '• 
 
 295. It is too late to urge objections 
 against universal education ; 
 
 the fountains of the grtat deep are brok- 
 en up, and a deluge of information, (4) 
 theological, (5) scientific, (4) civil. 
 (6) literary, is carrying all before it ; fil- 
 ling up the valleys, and scaling the f6] 
 3iouNTAiN-tops : a spirit of zhquiry has 
 gone forth, and sits brooding on the 
 mind of man. Mime— should be culti- 
 vated, not as a mere sensual gratifl 
 tion ; but as a means of elevating 
 improving the affections ; ennob 1 
 purifying and exalting the whole men. 
 
 296. Accustom yourself to submit, 
 on all occasions, (even in the most mi- 
 nute, as well as the most important cir- 
 cumstances in life.) to a small prh 
 foil, to obtain a greater distant good. — 
 This will give decision : ton-:, and ent 
 
 to mind ; which, thus disciplined, < 
 often reap victor} from defeat, and - 
 or from repulse. Having acquired 
 invaluable habit of rational prefer: 
 and just appreciation, start for the J 
 that endureth foreveb. 
 
 297. ThesajiDflections pass through 
 2, 3, o. or S notes, according to the >\ 
 
42 
 
 jfcct: Ex. "Do you say fl V 3] can learn 
 losing? do you say that [1 2' 5] can 
 iearn to sing ? What ! do you say that 
 {1 V 8] can learn to sing ? Reverse the 
 inflection ; begin at the top, and go 
 down. " He said [8 h 1] can learn to 
 sing ; not youP Thus, you see that the 
 voice may step up or down by discrete 
 degrees, or glide up and down by contin- 
 uous degrees. "To whom, the goblin, 
 full of wrath, replied : (1) Art thou that 
 (3) traitor (4) angel ? art thou he who 
 first broke peace in heaven, and (6) faith, 
 till then (8) unbroken? (9) Back to 
 thy punishment— false fugitive, and to 
 thy speed add wings ; lest with a whip 
 of scorpions I pursue thy lingering ; or 
 with one stroke of this dart, strange hor- 
 ror seize thee, and pangs, \infe\t before." 
 In speaking this sentence, use all the 
 eight notes. 
 
 298. In teaching spelling to children, 
 exercise them on the forty-four sounds 
 of the letters; then speaking in concert, 
 after the preceptor, and also individu- 
 ally, interspersing the exercises with 
 analizing words by giving the various 
 sounds of which they are composed. — 
 At first, let them give each sound by it- 
 self, after you, in a syllable ; then let 
 them give all the sounds in a syllable 
 before pronouncing it ; and finally, let 
 them give all the sounds in the word, 
 and then pronounce it : thus, there are 
 ihree modes, simple, difficult and more 
 difficult. Those, however, taught in 
 the old way, must expect that their 
 younger pupils especially, will soon 
 get ahead of them ; unless they apply 
 themselves very closely to their work. 
 
 299. Exs. of the ' and \. 1. Did you 
 say yes, or n6 ? Shall we crown the au- 
 thor of the public calamities? or shall we 
 destroy him? 2. Beware of ignorance 
 and sloth, and be guided by wisdom. — 
 3. [2] Are they Hebrews? [3] Are they 
 SI Hebrews ? [4] Are they Hebrews 
 from Palestine ? 4. What does the word 
 person mean? That which consists in 
 one's own self, and not any part or qual- 
 ity in another. 5. Is not water the best, 
 and safest of all kinds of drink ? Na- 
 ture — and Reason — answer — yes. 6. 
 The mind— is- its own place ; and, in 
 itself, can make a heaven — of hell ; or 
 J&ell of heaven. 
 
 300. Is there aught, in eloquence, 
 
 that can warm the heart ? She draws 
 her f ke from natural imagery. Is there 
 aught in poetry— to enliven the imagin- 
 ation ? There — is the secret of her pow- 
 er. Do,you love to gaze at the [3] sun, 
 the [4] moon and the [6] planets ? This 
 affection contains the science of Astron- 
 omy, as the seed contains the future 
 tree. Would a few pence duty, on tea, 
 for raising a revenue, have ruined the 
 fortunes of any of the Americans ? No ! 
 but the payment of one penny, on the 
 principle it was demanded, would have 
 made them slaves. 
 
 301. The inflections have great in- 
 fluence in expressing, or perverting the 
 sense, according as they are correctly 
 or ^correctly made. In the retirement 
 of a college — I am unable to suppress 
 evil thoughts ; how. difficult then, to do 
 it, amidst the world's temptations ? The 
 man who is in the daily use of ardent 
 (6) spirits, (4) if he does not become a 
 (3) drunkard, (6; is in danger of losing 
 his (5) health, and (6) character. The 
 rising inflection on drunkard, would im- 
 ply that he must become one, to pre- 
 serve his health and character. 
 
 302. Waves or Circumflexes of 
 the Voice : of these, there are two ; 
 which are called the rising circumflex 
 [v] and the falling circuflex [a] : they 
 are formed by the ' and the \ , and are 
 generally connected with the accented 
 vowels of the emphatic words. Doubt, 
 pity, contrast, grief, supposition, com- 
 parison, irony, implication, sneering, 
 railery, scorn, reproach, and contempt, 
 are expressed by them. Be sure and 
 get the right feeling and thought, and 
 you will find no difficulty in expressing 
 them properly, if you have mastered the 
 vo;ce. 
 
 303. Exs. of the rising v 1. I may 
 go to town to-morrow,though I cannot go 
 to-day. 2. The sun sets in the west, 
 not in the east. 3. He lives in London, 
 not in New-York. 4. The desire of 
 praise — produces excellent effects, in 
 men of sense. 5. He is more a knave, 
 than a fool. 6. I see thou hast leam'd 
 to rail, if thou hast learned nothing else. 
 
 7. Better to do well late, than never.— 
 
 8. A pretty fellow you are, to be sure. 
 
 304. Intonations and Melody of 
 Speech. By the first is meant— the 
 movement of the voice through the dif- 
 
43 
 
 ferent notes of the scale, Ascending and 
 DEScending ; by the second, an agreea- 
 ble succession of sounds, either in 
 Speech or song. A dull repetition of 
 words or sounds, on nearly the same 
 pitch, is very grating to the ear, and dis- 
 gusting to correct taste ; and yet it is 
 one of the most common faults of the 
 bar, the senate and pulpit ; indeed, in 
 everyplace where there is public speak- 
 ing • — the melancholy result of the usu- 
 al course of teaching children to read. 
 Nature abhors monotony, as much as 
 she does a vacuum. 
 
 305. Exs. of the falling a. 1. "Who 
 cares for you ? 2. He is your friend, is 
 he ? 3. You tell me so, do you ? 4. If 
 1 were to do so, what would you say ? 
 5. It is not prudence, when I trust my 
 secrets to a man who cannot keep his 
 own. 6. You are a very wise man, 
 strong, brave, peaceable. 7. If you 
 had told me so, perhaps, I should have 
 believed you. 8. Sir, you are a fool, 
 and I fe ar you w ill re m ain so . 
 
 306. Combination of the Waves.-- 
 Bat you forsooth, are. very wise men, 
 deeply learned in the truth ; we, weak, 
 contemptible, mean, persons ; but you, 
 
 j strong, gallant. Mere hirelings, and 
 time-servers— are always opposed to 
 (5) improvements, and (6) originality : 
 so are tyrants — to liberty, and republi- 
 canism. Wisdom alone — is truly fair; 
 vice , only appears so. 
 
 307. We must avoid a mechanical 
 variety, and adopt a natural one : this 
 
 i mayjbe seen in children, when relating 
 any thing that^comes from themselves 5 
 then, their intonations, melody, and va- 
 
 ' riety, are perfectly natural, and true to 
 
 I the object in view ; let us go and sit at 
 their feet and learn, and not be offend- 
 ed. Let us turn our eye and ear, to 
 truth, and nature ; for they will guide 
 
 .' their votaries right. Give us the soul 
 of elocution and music, and that will aid 
 
 j in forming the body. 
 
 308. Intonations Continued. Lis- 
 j ten to a person attentively, under the 
 
 influence of nature, of his own feelings 
 and thoughts ; he relates stories, sup- 
 ports arguments, commands those un- 
 i der his authority, speaks to persons at 
 ! a distance, utters exclamations of anger 
 and rage, joy and rapture, pours forth 
 lamentations of sorrow and grief. 
 
 breathes affection, love dec. in different 
 pitches, tones, qualities, emphasis, in- 
 flection and circumflexes, elevation and 
 depressions of voice. The only possibil- 
 ity of success, therefore, is — to get per- 
 fect control of the vo«al organs, by prac- 
 ticing these principles, and conforming 
 the whole manner to the sense and ob- 
 jects of the composition. 
 
 309. Intonations, &c. Our* [6] 
 Sight — is the most [4] perfect, and 
 most [5] delightful of all our senses. [4] 
 It fills the mind with the largest variety 
 of [3] ideas : [5] converses with its ob- 
 jects at the greatest [6] distance, and 
 continues the longest in [5] action, with- 
 out being [4] tired or [3] satiated, with 
 its proper enjoyments. [5] The [6] sense 
 of [8] feeling, can, indeed, give us the 
 idea of [5] extension, [6] shape, and all 
 other properties of matter, th't are per- 
 ceived by the [5] eye, except [4] colors, 
 [3] At the same time, it is very much 
 [5] straightened and [4] confined in its* 
 operations, to the [3] number, [4] bulk, 
 and [5] distance, of its peculiar objects, 
 
 310. Cadence— means a descent, or 
 fall of the voice ; here, r it means the prop- 
 er manner of closing a sentence. In 
 the preceding examples, the pupil sees 
 how it is made. The best cadence, that 
 which rests most pleasantly on the ear, 
 is the fall of a triad; i.e. a regular 
 gradation of three notes from the preva- 
 lent pitch of voice ; which is generally 
 the fourth or fifth : tho' different voices 
 are keyed on different pitches : hence , 
 each must be governed by his own pe- 
 culiarities in this respect. Beware ot 
 confounding cadence with inflections ; 
 and never end. a sentence with a feeble 
 and depressed utterance. 
 
 311. Intonations and Melody. — 
 These examples are given as general 
 guides, the figures referring to the 
 notes in the Diatonic Scale. 1. (4) But, 
 (5) from the (4) tomb, (5) the (4) voice 
 of (5) nature (()) cries, (6) And, (5) 11; 
 our (4) ashes, (5) live (4) their won (3 
 ted (2) fires. 2 But (0) yonder comes 
 (4) rejoicing in the (6) east. (5) The (I 
 powerful (3) King of (2) day. 3. 
 Awake ! (6) ARISE ! (6) or (5) be (3 
 forever (2) fallen. 4. (3) He expire. 
 in a (5) victualling house, (4). which 
 hope (5) 1 (3) shall (2) not. 7. (5) Fair 
 (ti) angel, thy (5) desire, which tends 
 
44 
 
 (6) enow The worksof (5) God, doth (4) 
 merit (3) praise. 8. (5) Such (4) hon- 
 ors Ilion to (6) her (5) lover paid, And 
 (5) peaceful slept (4) the mighty (3) 
 Hector's (2) shade. Note. Construct 
 a scale, and place the words on it as 
 indicated. 
 
 312. Dynamics. This, in mechani- 
 cal* philosophy, means the science of 
 moving powers : in elocution and sing- 
 ing, it relates to the force, loudness, 
 harshness, strength, roughness, softness, 
 swell, diminish, smoothness, abruptness, 
 gentleness of voice i that is, its qualities, 
 which are as various as those of the hu- 
 man mind; of which, indeed, they are 
 the representatives. Observe — that the 
 names of these qualities, when spoken 
 naturally, express, or echo, their natures. 
 The Loud, Rough, Soft, Smooth, Harsh, 
 Forcible, Full, Strong, Tremor, Slen- 
 der, &c, all of which are comprehended 
 in force, pitch, time, quantity, and ab- 
 ruptness of voice. Loud — But when 
 loud surges, lash the sounding shore ; 
 Rough — The hoarse rough voice, should 
 Sike the torrent roar. Soft: Soft is 
 the strain, when Zephyr gently blows ; 
 Smooth — And the smooth stream, in 
 smoother numbers flows. Harsh: On a 
 sudden, open fly with impetuous recoil 
 and jarring sound the infernal doors, 
 and on their hinges grate harsh thun- 
 der. Soft : Heaven opened wide her 
 : 'ver-during gates (harmonious sound) 
 on golden hinges turning. 
 
 313. Varieties. 1. Give variety in 
 -emphasis, inflections, and waves if "they 
 often occur. [3] Hippy, [5] happy, [6] 
 happy pair ! none but the [2] brave ! [6] 
 none but the [-5] brave ; none [8] but 
 brave deserve the fair, [6] What a piece 
 of work — is man, ! how noble in [5] rea- 
 son! how infinite in [6] faculties! in 
 [4] form, and [5] inovins;, how express 
 and [6] admirable ! in action, how like 
 an angel! in apprehension [4] how — 
 [1] like a God t 3. My judgment ap- 
 proves this measure, and my whole 
 beart — is in it : all th't I have ; [4] all 
 t'fet lam; and all thai hope, in this 
 life, I am now ready here to stake upon 
 it : and I leave off as I began ; that [4] 
 £%#., <3*r [6] swim; [5] live, or [3] die; 
 survive or [6] perish, — I am for the 
 peclar atton. It is my living sentiment, 
 &n& [2] by the. blessing of God, it shall 
 
 be my (fuing sentiment : [5] Indepen- 
 dence — [6] now; [8] and Independence — 
 [9] Forever ! 
 
 314, Dynamics Continued. These 
 contrasts produce great effects, when 
 properly exhibited, both in elocution and 
 music. The rushing loud, indicates 
 dread, alarm, warning, &c. ; the soft, 
 their opposites : the tendency of indis- 
 tinctness is, to remove objects to a dis- 
 tance, throwing them into the back 
 ground of the picture ; and of fullness, 
 to bring them into the fore ground, 
 making them very prominent ; thus it 
 is that the Polyph-onist deceives, or im- 
 poses upon the ear, making his sounds 
 correspond to those he would represent, 
 near by, and at a distance. 
 
 315. Forcible. Now storming fury 
 rose, and clamor; such as heard in heav- 
 en, till now, was never : arms on ar- 
 mor clashing, brayed horrible discord ; 
 and the maddening wheels of brazen 
 chariots raged. Full : High on a throne 
 of royal state, which far outshone the 
 wealth of Ormus, and of Inde ; or where 
 the gorgeous east, with richest hand, 
 showers on her kings barbaric, pearl 
 and gold, Satan, exalted, sat. Strong : 
 Him, the Almighty Power hurled 
 headlong, flaming from the ethereal 
 skies, with hideous ruin and combus- 
 tion, dow r n to bottomless perdition — 
 there to dwell in adamantine chains, 
 and penal fire, — who durst defy the Om- 
 nipotent to arms. 
 
 316. Word-Painting. There is noth- 
 ing in any of the other fine arts but 
 what is involved in oratory. The let- 
 ters are analogous to uncom pounded 
 paints ; words to paints prepared 
 for use ; and, when arranged into 
 appropriate and significant sentences, 
 they form pictures of the ideas on the can- 
 vass of the imagination : hence, compo- 
 sition, whether written or spoken, is 
 like a picture; exhibiting a great variety 
 of features, not only with prominence, 
 but with degrees of prominence : to do 
 which, the painter, speaker, or writer, 
 applies shades of the same color, to 
 features of the same class, and oppos- 
 ing colors to those of different classes. 
 
 317. Variety. Eve's lament on 
 leaving Paradise a O ! unexpected 
 stroke, worse than of death ! Must I 
 thus leave thee, Paradise ? thus leave 
 
45 
 
 thee, native soil, these happy walks and 
 shades ? flowers, that never will in 
 other climate grow, who now will rear 
 you to the sun, and water from the am- 
 brosial fount ? Thee, lastly, nuptial 
 bower, by me adorned, from thee— bow 
 shall I part, and whither wander — 
 down into a lower world, to this— ob- 
 scure and wild ? 
 
 318. Words are paints, the voice 
 -the brush, and the mind the painter; 
 
 but science, practice, genius, taste, 
 judgement and emotion are necessary 
 in order t o paint well: and there is as 
 much difference between a good and 
 bad reader, as there is between a good 
 painter and a mere dauber. What gives 
 expression to painting ? Emphasis. We 
 look upon some pictures and remark, 
 '•'that is a strong outline ;" "a very ex- 
 pressive countenance :" this is Em- 
 phasis : again, we look upon others, and 
 there is a softness, delicacy, and tender- 
 ness, that melts the soul as she contem- 
 plates them : this is emotion. 
 
 319. Modulation — signifies the ac- 
 commodation of the voice, (in its diver- 
 sifications of all these principles,) to 
 every variety and shade of thought and 
 feeling. The upper pitches of voice, 
 we know are used in calling persons at 
 a distance, for impassioned emphasis of 
 certain kinds, and for very earnest ar- 
 guments; the middle pitches, for gener- 
 al conversation, and easy, familiar 
 speaking, of a descriptive and didactic 
 character ; and the lower ones, for ca- 
 dences, and the exhibition of emphasis 
 in grave and solemn reading and speak- 
 ing. 
 
 320. The pitch of voice is exceed- 
 ingly important in every branch of our 
 subject, and particularly, in the higher 
 parts ; and this among the rest. You 
 must not often raise your voice to the 
 eighth note; for it will be harsh and un- 
 pleasant to the ear, and very apt to 
 break : nor drop it to the first note; for 
 then, your articulation will be difficult 
 and indistinct, and you cannot impart 
 any life and spirit to your manner and 
 matter ; as there is little or no compass, 
 below this pitch : both these extremes 
 must be carefully avoided. 
 
 321. Modulation Continued. The 
 situation of the public reader and speak- 
 er, calls for the employment of the most 
 
 refined art in the management 
 voice : 'he should address a whole as- 
 sembly with as much apparent ease anc 
 pleasure to himself and audience, a» 
 tho' there were but a single person pres- 
 ent. In addressing an auditory which 
 meets tor information or amusement, or 
 both, the judicious speaker will adopt his 
 ordinary and most familiar voice : to 
 ! show that he rises without bias or pre- 
 | judiee, that he wishes reason, not pas- 
 I sion, should guide them all. He wii. 
 , endeavor to be heard by the most dis- 
 tant hearers, without offending the ear 
 I of the nearest one, by making all 
 tones audible, distinct and natural. 
 
 322. Varieties. 1. Modesty in 
 your discourse, will give a lustre to 
 truth, and excuse to your errors. 2. 
 Some are silent, for want of matter, or 
 assurance ; others are talkative, for 
 want of sense, 3. To judge of men by 
 their actions, one would suppose that a 
 great proportion was mad, and that the 
 world was one immense mad-house, 
 4. Prodigals are rich, for a moment, 
 economists, for ever. 5. To do unto 
 others, as we would they should do to 
 us, is a golden maxim, that cannot be- 
 too deeply impressed on our minds. 
 6. Continue to add a little to what was 
 originally a little, and you will make 
 it a great deal. 7. The value of sound, 
 correct principles, early implanted in 
 the human mind, is incalculable. 
 
 323. Some telf us ; that when com- 
 mencing an address, the voice shouli 
 be directed to those most distant; bu: 
 this is evidently wrong. At the begin- 
 ning, the mind is naturally clear and 
 serene, the passions unawakened*; if 
 the speaker adopt this high pitch, how 
 can it be elevated, afterwards, agreea- 
 bly to those emotions and sentiments, 
 which require still higher pitches? To 
 strain the voice thus, destroys all so- 
 lemnity, weight and dignity, and gives 
 what one says a squeaking effeminacv, 
 unbecoming a manly and impressive 
 speaker; it makes the voice harsh ana 
 unmusical, and also produces hoarse- 
 ness. 
 
 324. STRENGTn of Voice. The voice 
 is weak, or strong, in proportion to the 
 less, or greater, number of organs anil 
 muscles, that are brought into action. 
 If one uses only the upper part of the 
 

 46 
 
 ^best, his voice will be weak : if he uses 
 £ne whole body, as he should do, (not in 
 the most powerful manner of course on 
 common occasions) his voice will be 
 strong. Hence, to strengthen a weak 
 voice, the student must practice expel- 
 ling the vowel sounds, using all the ab- 
 dominal and dorsal nerves and muscles : 
 in addition to which, he should read and 
 recite when standing or sitting, and 
 walking on a level plain, and up hill : 
 success will be the result of faithful 
 practice. 
 
 325. Demosthenes, we are informed, 
 had three particular defects ; first, weak- 
 ness of voice • which he strengthened 
 by declaiming on the sea-shore, amid 
 the roar of waters ; which effort would 
 tend directly to bring into use the lower 
 parts of the body : second, shortness of 
 breath ; which he remedied by repeat- 
 ing his orations as he walked up hill ; 
 which act serves to bring into use the 
 appropriate organs, and fully inflate the 
 lungs ; (observe, by the abdominal mus- 
 cles alone, and not by the thorax :) and 
 third, a thick mumbling way of speak- 
 ing ; which he overcame by reading 
 and reciting with pebbles in his mouth ; 
 which required him to make a greater 
 effort from below, and open his mouth 
 wider. Examine yourself and act ac- 
 cordingly. 
 
 326. Transition— means, in speech, 
 the changes of pitch from one note to 
 another; as from the eighth to the third : 
 or from the sixth to the first ; and vice 
 versa; to correspond in variety and char- 
 acter to the sentiment and emotion. In 
 singing, it means changing the place of 
 the key note, so as to keep the tune with- 
 in the scale of twenty two degrees. In 
 transition— the pitches of voice are not 
 only changed, but its qualities, agreeably 
 to the nature and object of the compos- 
 ition j however, there must never be 
 any sacrifice of other principles— all the 
 proportions must be preserved.. 
 
 327. Varieties. 1. Whatever one 
 possesses, becomes doubly valuable, by 
 having the happiness of dividing it with 
 a friend. 2. He who loves riches more 
 than his friend, does not deserve to be 
 loved. 3. He who would pass the latter 
 part of his life with honor, and use- 
 fulness," must, when he is young, con- 
 sider that he shall one day be old ; and 
 
 when he is old, remember that he has 
 once been young. 4. The rolling Plan- 
 ets, and the glorious Sun, Still keep that 
 order which they first begun; But 
 wretched Man, alone, has gone astray, 
 Swerved from his God, and walks anoth- 
 er way, 5. The old live in the past, as 
 truly as the young do in the future. 6. 
 Fix upon a high standard of character j 
 to be thought well of. is not sufficient : 
 the point you are to aim at, is, the great- 
 est possible degree of usefulness. 7. He 
 who only aims at little, will accomplish 
 but little. 
 
 328. Style — comprehends all the 
 principles of elocution, and denotes the 
 manner in which different kinds of com- 
 position should be read, or spoken : of 
 course, therv are as many kinds of style, 
 as there are of composition ; and unless 
 a person has command of body and 
 mind, he cannot harmonize his manner 
 and matter. If in writing, style means 
 proper words, in proper places ; in 
 speaking, it must signify, proper sounds 
 in proper places. 
 
 329. What causeth the earth to 
 bring forth and yield her increase ? Is 
 it not the light and heat of the sun, that 
 unlocks her native energies and gives 
 them their power? In an analogous 
 manner should the light of the thought, 
 and the heat of its accompanying affec- 
 tion, (whether original or selected,) act 
 upon the mind, which will communicate 
 the influence received to the whole body. 
 and the body to the voice and actions. 
 This is what is meant by imbibing the 
 author's feelings, and bringing before 
 you all the circumstances, and plunging 
 amid the living scenes, and feeling that 
 whatever you describes:* actually pres- 
 ent, and passing: beforryour mind. 
 
 330. The following are the terms us- 
 ually applied to style, in writing, and 
 also in speaking ; each of which has 
 its distinctive characteristics ; though 
 all of them have somethingin common. 
 Bombastic, Dry, Elegant, Epistolary, 
 Flowing, Harsh, Laconic, Lofty, Loose. 
 Terse, Tumid, Verbose. There are also 
 styles of occasion, time,, place, &c : such 
 as the style of the Bar, of the Legisla- 
 ture, and of the Pulpit ; also the dra- 
 matic style, comedy, (high and low,) 
 Farce and Tragedy. 
 
 331* Delivery— addresses itsetfta 
 
 
47 
 
 the mind through two mediums, the eye 
 and the ear : hence it naturally divides 
 itself into two parts, voice and gesture ; 
 both of which must be sedulously culti- 
 vated, under the guidance of proper 
 feeling, and correct thought. That style 
 is the best, which is the most transpa- 
 rent ; hence, the grand aim of the elocu- 
 tionist should be perfect transparency ; 
 and when this part is attained, he will 
 be listened to with pleasure, be perfectly 
 understood, and do justice to his subject, 
 his powers, and his profession. 
 
 332. The conversational must be 
 delivered in the most natural, easy, fa- 
 miliar, distinct, and agreeable manner; 
 the narrative and didactive, with a clear 
 and distinct articulation, correct em- 
 phasis, proper inflections, and appropri- 
 ate modulations ; because it is not so 
 much your object to excite the affec- 
 tions, as to inform the understanding : 
 the argumentative, and reasoning, de- 
 mand great deliberation, slowness, dis- 
 tinctness, frequent pauses, candor, 
 strong emphasis and occasional vehe- 
 mence. No one can,, become a good 
 reader and speaker, without much prac- 
 tice and many failures. 
 
 333. Declamatohy and Hortatory 
 — indicate a deep interest for the per- 
 sons addressed, a horror of the evil 
 they are entreated to avoid, and an ex- 
 alted estimate of the good they are ex- 
 horted to pursue. The exhibition of 
 the strongest feeling, requires such a 
 degree of self control, as, in the very 
 torrent, tempest and whirlwind of pas- 
 sion, possesses a temperance to give it 
 smoothness. DRAMATic-sometimes calls 
 for the exercise of all the vocal and 
 mental powers : hence, one must con- 
 sider the character represented, the cir- 
 cumstances under which he acted, the 
 state of feeling he possessed, and every 
 thing pertaining to the scene with which 
 he was connected. 
 
 334. Ignorance and error. It is 
 almost as difficult to make one unlearn 
 his errors, as his knowledge. Mal-in- 
 formation is more hopeless than non-in- 
 formation, for error is always more 
 busy than ignorance. Ignorance is a 
 blank sheet, on which we may write ; 
 but error is a scribbled one, from which 
 we must first erase. Ignorance is con- 
 tented to staud st ill j with her back to the 
 
 truth ; but error is more presumpta* 
 ous, and proceeds in the same direction. 
 Ignorance has no light, but error fol- 
 lows a false one. The consequence is, 
 that error, when she retraces her foot- 
 steps, has farther to go, before she can 
 arrive at the truth, than ignorance. 
 
 335. Earnestness of manner is of vi- 
 tal importance, in sustaining a trans- 
 parent style ; and this must be imbibed 
 internally, and felt with all the truth 
 and certainty of nature. By proper ex- 
 ercises on these principles, as indicated, 
 a person may acquire the power of pass-- 
 ing, at will, from grave to gay, and 
 
 j from lively to severe, without confound- 
 ing one with the other : there are times. 
 j however, when they maybe united ; as 
 l in the humorous and pathetic together. 
 
 336. To succeed in these higher 
 parts of oratory, one must throw him- 
 self into the condition, and shape, he 
 
 1 wishes to fill or be, and bring the body 
 1 into perfect subjection : by assuming 
 the appropriate language of action and 
 earnestness, he may work himself into 
 any frame of mind, that the subject de- 
 mands. He must be sure to keep up 
 the life, spirit and energy of the compo- 
 sition, and let there be a light and glow- 
 in his style. He must also cultivate a 
 bold and determined manner ; for if he 
 takes no special interest in what he is 
 reading or speaking, he may rest assur- 
 ed others will not. 
 
 337. SrGGESTiONS. Let" the pupils 
 select and memorize any of the prov- 
 erbs, laconics, maxims or questions, 
 and recite them on occasions like the 
 following : when they first assemble 
 in the school-room j or, meet together 
 in the social circle ; let them also carry 
 on a kind of conversation, or dialogue 
 with them, and each strive to get one 
 appropriate to the supposed state, char- 
 acter, Ace. of another : or use them in a 
 variety of ways that their ingenuity 
 may suggest. 
 
 338. The Passions and Actions. 
 The human mind we contemplate un- 
 der two grand divisions, which are cal- 
 led Will and Understanding : the for- 
 mer is the recepticle, or continent, of 
 our Passions, Emotions, Affections ; th*» 
 latter of our Thoughts. To attend to the 
 workings of mind, to trace the power 
 that external objects have over it, Vo di*- 
 
48 
 
 ■rem the nature of the emotions and af- 
 fections, and to comprehend the reasons 
 Ctf their being affected in a particular 
 manner, must have a direct influence on 
 <our pursuits, character and happiness, 
 as private citizens, and as public speak- 
 ers. 
 
 339* An accurate analysis of the 
 passions and affections is, to the moral- 
 ist, as well as the student in Elocution, 
 what the science of Anatomy and Phys- 
 iology is to the Physician and Surgeon: 
 it constitutes the first principles of ra- 
 tional practice for both ; it is in a moral 
 view the anatomy of the heart, discloses 
 why and how it beats : indicates ap- 
 pearances in a sound and healthy state, 
 and detects diseases, with their causes, 
 and is much more fortunate in applying 
 remedies. 
 
 340. There are three things involv- 
 ed in the exhibition of the passions ; viz. 
 the tones of the voice, the appearance of 
 die countenance, and rhetorical action ; 
 the first is addressed to the ear only, the 
 latter to the eye. Here, then, is anoth- 
 er- language to learn, after the pupil has 
 ; earned 'the written and the vocal lan- 
 guages : however, the language of the 
 passions may be said to be written — by 
 Uie hand of Nature. Contemplate the 
 passions separately, and combined, and 
 seek for examples to illustrate them. 
 
 34 1* Lyceum and Debating Socie- 
 ties, are admirable Associations for the 
 improvement of mind, and cultivation 
 of talent, for public or private speaking. 
 Franklin and Roger Sherman, (the one 
 a printer, and the other a shoe-maker,) 
 rose from obscurity to great eminence, 
 and usefulness, by their own efforts : so 
 may we, by using the proper means. It 
 was in a Debating. Society, that Lord 
 Brougham first displayed his superior 
 talents and unrivalled eloquence ; and 
 there, also, Henry Clay, the greatest 
 American orator, commenced his bril- 
 liant career. A word to those who 
 would be wise is enough. 
 
 VARIETY OF PRINCIPLES AND 
 EXAMPLES. 
 342. Diseases of the Throat — are 
 connected, particularly, with those parts 
 of the body, which are involved in 
 breathing, and relate to the understand- 
 ing, or reasoning faculties of the mind : 
 
 thus, thinking and breathing are insep* 
 arably connected together ; as are feel- 
 ing and acting : hence, the predomi- 
 nance of thought, in the exercise of the 
 voice, or in any kind of action, and zeal 
 without knowledge, tend directly to 
 such perversions of mind and body, as 
 induce, not only diseases of the throat, 
 but even pulmonary diseases : if, then, 
 we will to be free, in any respect, we 
 must return to truth and nature ; for 
 they will guide the obedient in the right 
 way. 
 
 343. Varieties. 1. He who is cau- 
 tious and prudent, is generally secure 
 from many dangers, to which many 
 others are exposed. 2. A fool may ask 
 more questions in an hour, than a wise 
 man may answer in seven years. 3. 
 The manner in which words are deliv- 
 ered, contribute mainly to the effects 
 they are to produce, and the importance 
 which is attached to them. 4. Shall 
 this greatest of free nations be the best ? 
 5. One of the greatest obstacles to 
 knowledge and excellence, is indolence. 
 (5. One hour's sleep before midnight, is 
 worth two afterward. 7. Science or 
 learning, is of little use, unless guided 
 by good sense. 8. Any violation of 
 law. is a breach of morality. 
 
 344. Pay particular attention not only 
 to the errors in pronunciation of for- 
 eigners, but to those of our own country; 
 let nothing of importance escape your 
 critical observation : in this way, your 
 voice, taste, and ear, will be cultivated, 
 and you be saved from such defects as 
 would, if indulged in, impede your pro- 
 gress in these arts, and prevent you 
 from being extensively useful in your 
 day and generation. 
 
 345 Inducing Disease. There is no 
 doubt, that the seeds of a large number 
 of diseases are sown in childhood and 
 youth ; and especially in ofir progress 
 in obtaining what is called, an educa- 
 tion. The bad habits of position in and 
 out of school, and our unhealthy mode 
 of living, contribute very essentially to 
 the promotion of various diseases ; par- 
 ticularly, dyspepsia, liver and lung 
 complaints, and headaches. Hence, we 
 cannot be too watchful against sitting in 
 a crooked position, nor too wise in eat- 
 ing, drinking and sleeping, as well as 
 in our clothing and our lodging apart- 
 
49 
 
 ttients. Let us leave no stone unturned, 
 to do and be what is our duty and privi- 
 lege, in body and in mind. 
 
 346. The chief source of indistinct- 
 ness is precipitancy, which arises from 
 the bad method of teaching reading : the 
 child, not being- taught the true beauty 
 and propriety of reading, thinks all ex- 
 cellence consists in quickness and rap- 
 idity : to him the prize seems destined 
 t® the mrift ; for he sets out at a gallop, 
 and continues his speed to the end, re- 
 gardless of how many letters,or syllables, 
 he omits by the way, or how many words 
 he runs together. ik O reform it alto- 
 gether." 
 
 347. Varieties. 1. Without exer- 
 tion and diligence, success, in the pur- 
 suits of life, is rarely attained. 2. It is 
 the business of the Judge to decide as to 
 the points of law, and the duty of the 
 jurors — to decide as to the matters of 
 fact. 3. The essence of our liberty is — 
 to do whatever we please, provided we 
 do not violate any law, or injure anoth- 
 er. 4. A handful of common sense is 
 worth a bushel of learning. 5. Few 
 things are more injurious to our health 
 and constitution, than indulgence in 
 luxuries. 6. Did God, after creating 
 the Universe, and putting it in motion, 
 leave it to itself? 7. Credit is of ines- 
 timable value, whether to a nation, or 
 an individual. 8. There can be no 
 stronger test of good faith, than strict 
 honesty in pecuniary transactions. 9. 
 Vlhy do I prefer, through false modesty, 
 to remain ignorant, rather than to ac- 
 quire knowledge ? 
 
 348. The expression of affection is 
 the legitimate function of smmd, which 
 is an element prior to, and within lan- 
 guage. The affections produce the va- 
 rieties of sound, whether of joy or grief; 
 and sound, in speech , manifests both the 
 quality and quantity of the affection : 
 hence, all the music is in the vowel sounds, 
 because, all music is from the afectuous 
 part of the mind, and vowels are its on- 
 ly mediums of manifestation. As 
 music proceeds from affection and is ad- 
 dressed to the affection, a person does 
 not truly sing, unless he sings from af- 
 fection ; nor does a person truly listen, 
 und derive the greatest enjoyment from 
 the music, unless he yields himself fully 
 <o the affection which the music inspires. 
 
 349. The perfection of music, as well 
 as of speech, depends upon giving the 
 full and free expression of our thoughts 
 and affections, so as to produce corres- 
 ponding ones in the minds of others. 
 This is not the work of a day, a month, 
 or a year j but of a life ; for it implies 
 the full developement of mind and body. 
 The present age presents only a faint 
 resemblance of what music and oratory 
 are capable of becoming; for we are 
 surrounded, and loaded, with almost as 
 many bad habits, which prevent the per- 
 fect cultivation of humanity, as an Egyp- 
 tian Mummy is of folds of linen. Let 
 the axe of truth, of principle, be laid at 
 the root of every tree that does not bring 
 forth good fruit. "Which do we like bet- 
 ter — error, or truth ? 
 
 350. The standard for propriety and 
 force in public speaking is— to speak 
 just as one would naturally express him- 
 self in earnest conversation in private 
 company. Such should we all do if 
 left to ourselves, and early pains 
 were not taken to substitute an artifi- 
 cial method in the room of that which is 
 natural. Beware of imagining that you 
 must read in a different way, with dif- 
 ferent tones and cadences, from that of 
 common speaking. 
 
 351. Effect. What is the use of 
 reading, speaking, and singing, if the 
 proper effect is not produced ? If the 
 singing in our church choirs, and the 
 reading and speaking in the desk and 
 pulpit, w 7 ere what they ought to be, and 
 what they ma3^ be, the house of God 
 would be more thronged than theatres 
 ever have been. Oh ! when will the 
 best of truths be delivered in the best 
 of manners — May the stars of elocution 
 and music, be more numerous than the 
 stars of heaven ! 
 
 35 2. Faults in articulation, early 
 contracted, are suffered to gain strength 
 by habit, and to grow so inveterate by 
 time, as to be almost incurable. Hence', 
 parents should assist their children to 
 pronounce correctly, in their first at- 
 tempts to speak, instead of permitting 
 them to pronounce in a faulty manner ■ 
 but some, so far from endeavoring to 
 correct them, encourage them to go on 
 in their baby talk— a vicious mode of 
 articulation. Has wisdom fed from 
 men, or was she driven away. 
 
50 
 
 353. Important questions. 1, Who 
 is the Creator and Maker of all things? 
 2. What was the design of God in mak- 
 ing man? 3. Are all equally intelli- 
 gent? 4. Ought any thing to be receiv- 
 ed without due examination? 5. Do 
 men exert a greater influence on socie- 
 ty than women? 6. Can the immor- 
 tality of the soul be proved from the 
 light of nature? 7. What is requisite 
 for the right formation of character ? 8. 
 Did mankind fall suddenly ,or by degrees ? 
 9. Can we be responsible, without be- 
 ing endowed with freedom and ration- 
 ality? 10. Is not death a continuation 
 of life? 11. Will not the soul continue 
 in being for ever? 12. Who, only, are 
 blessed? 
 
 ilii 
 
 354. Here is an engraving of the 
 larynx (1) and superior extremity of 
 the trachea ; the wind pipe or trachea, 
 (2) showing its rings of cartilaginous 
 bands; the bronchial tubes (3, 4) 
 branching off from the windpipe, and 
 going to each lobe of the lungs : the 
 left lobe of the lung is whole ; the sub- 
 stance of the right one has been removed, 
 to show the ramifications of the bron- 
 chial twigs, terminating in the air cells, 
 (7 ? 7 ? 8,)— the right lung is much lar- 
 ger than the left. 
 
 355. Observations. No one can ev- 
 er become a good reader, or speaker, 
 by reading in a book ; beeause, what is 
 
 thus acquired is more from thought, than 
 from jeeling j and of course, has less of 
 freedom in it, and we are, from the ne- 
 cessity o£ the case, more or less con- 
 strained and mechanical. What we 
 hear enters more directly into the affec- 
 /Mtfwspart of the mind, than what we 
 see, and becomes more readily a part of 
 ourselves, i. e. becomes conjoined instead 
 of being adjoined: relatively, as the 
 Jood winch we eat, digests and is ap- 
 propriated, and a plaster that is merely 
 stuck on the body. Thus, we can see a 
 philosophic reason why faith is said to 
 come by hearing ; and that we walk by 
 faith and not by right : i. e. from love, 
 that casts out the fear that hath torment, 
 and which enslaves body and mind, in- 
 stead of making both free. 
 
 356. Important Questions. 1. Is 
 there any line of demarcation between 
 /fewperance and in temperance ? 2. Are 
 fictitious writings beneficial ? 3. Does 
 wealth exert more influence than knowl- 
 edge ? 4. What were the causes of the 
 downfall of the ancient empires ? 5. Are 
 monopolies consistent with Republican In- 
 stitutions ? 6. What advantage has. a Re- 
 public over a Monarchy ? 7. Which is the 
 stronger passion, Love or An°tr}%. Has 
 the invention of Gunpowder been bene- 
 ficial to the world? 9. Ought females to 
 be allowed to vote? 10. Who does. so- 
 ciety more injury, the robber or slanderer? 
 11. Are Rail Roads said Canals & benefit 
 to the country? 12. Can there be any 
 true virtue without piety ? 
 
 35 7. How frequently an incorrect 
 mode of pronunciation, and speaking, 
 is caught from an ignorant nurse, or 
 favorite servant, which infects one 
 through life ! so much depends on first 
 impressions and habits. Lisping, stam- 
 mering, and smaller defects, often o- 
 ! riginate in the same way, and not from 
 I any natural defect, or impediment. If pa- 
 rents and teachers would duly consider 
 the subject, they might see the impor- 
 tance of their trust and be induced to fulfil 
 their respective offices in a conscientious 
 manner : to do wrong, in any way is a sin. 
 
 Note. When giving any thing amu- 
 sing, we must not laugh, because we 
 read or speak to make others laugh, and 
 if our hearers laugh so loud as to drown 
 j our voice, we must pause till order is 
 , restored: read for the benefit of others. 
 
51 
 
 858. Look on this Picture. 
 
 Venus de Medicis. 
 
 Here is a representation of the fa- 
 mous statue of the Venus de Medici. 
 which may be considered the beau%deal 
 of a fine female figure, the dress of 
 which is in accordance with the princi- 
 ples of Physiology and the laws of life : 
 and no one can expect to enjoy health 
 without conforming to them. Doubly 
 blessed will those be who are instru- 
 mental in promoting the necessary re- 
 form. 
 
 359. Now look on this. 
 
 Deformity; or A Modern Belle ! 
 Here is a figure of a modern 'board- 
 ing-school miss,' after she has been per- 
 manently remodeled by stays and cursed 
 boards: it is as gross a perversion of Na- 
 ture and of grace, as the eyes of man 
 
 ever beheld. If any girl or lady thinks 
 to become more acceptable to the other 
 sex by such a habit, let her be inform- 
 ed that the writer's experience and ob- 
 servation are by no means small, and 
 yet he never heard a gentleman that ap- 
 proved of this odious fashion. Be as- 
 sured, that the practice is baneful to 
 health, destructive of intellect, subver- 
 sive of morals, and suicidal in its effect. 
 
 360. Position on horseback. Many 
 persons injure themselves by not pre- 
 serving a proper position; and others, 
 invalids especially, do not derive that 
 benefit they might otherwise receive 
 to themselves. Let a person throw his 
 shoulders back, and turn his heels out 
 from the horse, and the toes in, and he 
 will find it impossible to sit upon the 
 saddle in a bent position : and in riding 
 for the purpose of removing the dys- 
 pepsia, the abdominal muscles should 
 not be contracted, but left in a relaxed 
 state. 
 
 361. Proverbs. 1. Accusing; — is 
 proving, when malice and power sit as 
 judges. 2. Adversity — may make one 
 wise, but not rich. 3. Idle folks — take 
 the most pains. 4. Every one is archi- 
 tect of his own fortune. 5. Fine feath- 
 ers make fine birds. 6. Go into the 
 country — to hear the news of the town. 7 . 
 He is a good orator — who convinces 
 himself. 8. If you cannot bite, never 
 show your teeth. 9. Lawyer's houses, 
 are built on the heads of jools. 10. Lit- 
 tie, and often, fill the purse. 11. Much, 
 would have more, and lost all. 12. 
 Practice— makes perfect. 
 
 362. Inhumanity. Why is it, that 
 pulmonary disease is so frightfully on 
 the increase? Our country is more 
 healthy than it formerly was : the suc- 
 ceeding settlers suffer vastly more with 
 consumption and dyspepsia than did the 
 pioneers. Our inhuman mode of living 
 and dressing, has produced the mourn- 
 ful change ; intemperance hi eating and 
 drinking, and the crowning sin of tight 
 latin? are driving their thousands to a 
 premature grave. 
 
 363. A just delivery consists in a 
 distinct articulation of words, pronoun- 
 ced in . proper tones, suitably varied to 
 the sense, and the emotions of the mind ; 
 with due observation of accent, the sev- 
 eral gradations of emphasis ; pauses or 
 
52 
 
 rests in proper places, and well measur- 
 ed degrees of time ; and the whole ac- 
 companied with expressive looks, and 
 significant gestures. To conceive, and 
 to execute, are two different things : the 
 first may arise from study and observa- 
 tion ; the second is the effect of practice. 
 
 364. It is much to be regretted, that 
 our teachers are so illy qualified — to in- 
 struct their pupils in even the first rudi- 
 ments of reading : and they are all so 
 much inclined to fall into bad habits, 
 and the imitation of faulty speakers, that 
 it requires constant watchfulness to 
 keep clear of the influences of a wrong 
 bias, and false and merely arbitrary 
 rules. We never can succeed in this 
 important art, until we take elementary 
 instruction out of the hands of ignora- 
 muses, and insist upon having persons 
 who are fully competent to take charge 
 of the cause. Away then with the idea, 
 that any one can teach reading and speak- 
 ing, merely because they can call the 
 letters, and speak the words so as to be 
 understood. 
 
 365. Important questions. 1. Is 
 there more«than one God? 2. "Was the 
 world created out of nothing ? 3 What 
 is the meaning of the expression, — 
 "let us make man in our imi«e, after 
 our own likeness?" 4. By what means 
 can we become happy? 5. Can we be 
 a friend, and an enemy, at the same time ? 
 6. Are miracles the most convincing evi- 
 dences of truth ? 7. Will dying for prin- 
 ciples, prove any thing more than the 
 sincerity of the martyr ? 8. Is it possi- 
 ble for a created being to merit salvation 
 by good works ? 9. Have we life of our 
 own ; or are we dependent on God for it 
 every moment? 10. What is the dif- 
 ference between good, and evil ? 11. Is 
 any law independent of its maker ? 12. 
 Are miracles — violations of nature's laws ? 
 
 366. Analogies. There are strik- 
 ing analogies in all the arts ; and par- 
 ticularly, in those denominated the Fine 
 Arts. Music, on certain instruments, 
 may be compared to statuary, or sculp- 
 ture ; on some others, it is like painting, 
 landscape or portrait. Some persons, 
 execute one part, others a different part, 
 with more or less of taste and effect. 
 But there is no other sister art, with 
 which music is more inseparably con- 
 nected, than that of oratory ; which may | 
 
 be denned— the art of pouring out the 
 inmost soul, through appropriate tones f 
 words and gestures. 
 
 367. Rules for the \. When ques- 
 tions are not answered by yes, or no — as 
 — Who is that lady ? In Affirmative 
 sentences ; as — I am prepared to go : 
 — language of Authority ; as — Back 
 to thy punish ment, false — fugitive : — 
 Terror ; as— The light burns blue : — 
 Surprise; as, Sir, I perceive that thou art 
 a prophet: — Reprehension; as — You are 
 very much to blame, for suffering him 
 to pass : — Indignation : — Go — false fel- 
 low, and let me never see your face a- 
 gain : Contempt ; as— To Uve in awe 
 of such a thing as I myself: — Excla- 
 mation : nature ! how honorable is 
 thy empire ! — in Rhetorical Dialogue, 
 when one or more persons are repre- 
 sented ; as — James said, Charles go 
 and do as you were bidden ; and John 
 said, he need not go at present, for I 
 have something for him to do:— and 
 the Final Pause ; as— All general rules 
 have some exceptions. 
 
 368. Style. The character of a per- 
 son's style of reading and speaking — 
 depends upon his moral perceptions of the 
 ends, causes, and effects, of the composi- 
 tion : thus, style may be considered 
 the man himself, and, as every one sees 
 and/*g/$, with regard to every thing, ac- 
 cording to the state or condition of his 
 mind, and as there are and can be no 
 two persons alike ; each individual will 
 have a manner and style peculiar to 
 himself; though in the main, that of 
 two persons of equal education and in- 
 telligence, may be in a great degree 
 similar. 
 
 369. Important Questions. 1. Is 
 the casket more valuable than the jewel? 
 2. Will not the safety of the community 
 be endangered, by permitting the mur- 
 derer to live? 3. Are Theatres— benefi- 
 cial to mankind ? 4. Did Napolean do 
 more hurt than good to the world ? 5. 
 Were the Texans right— in rebelling a- 
 gainst Mexico ? 6. Ought the license 
 system to be abolished ? 7. Is Animal 
 Magnetism true? 8. Who was the great* 
 er monster Nero, or Cataline •? 9. Should 
 we act from policy or from principle ? 
 10. Is not the improvement of the mind> 
 of the first importance? 11. If a man 
 is in earnest, should we therefore cali 
 
53 
 
 Mm a janatic ? 12. Is not zeal in the 
 cause of truth and goodness always 
 commendable ? 
 
 370. Rules for the '. When ques- 
 tions are answered by yes or no, they 
 generally require the '. Exs. Are you 
 well ? Is" he gone ? Have you got your 
 hat? Do you -say yes? Can he accom- 
 modate me ? Will you call and see me? 
 But when the questions are emphatic, 
 or amount to an affirmative, \ is used. 
 Are you well ? As much as to say : tell 
 me whether you are well. Is he gone? 
 Have you done it? All given in an 
 authoritative manner. Hath he said it, 
 and shall he not do it ? He that plant- 
 ed the tar. shall he not hear ? Is he a 
 mkn, that he should repent ? 
 
 371. The more your reading and 
 speaking partake of the freedom and 
 ease of common discourse, (provided, 
 you sustain the object and life of the 
 composition) the more just, natural, and 
 eitective will be your style of delivery : 
 hence the necessity of studying nature, 
 of avoiding all affectation, and of never 
 attempting that in public, which is be- 
 yond your ability. Some mar, or spoil 
 what they are going to say, by making 
 so much Justification over it, thinking 
 they must do some great thing; when 
 it is almost as simple as — wash and be 
 clean : whatever is not natural is not a- 
 greeable or persuasive. 
 
 372. Proverbs. 1. A burden that 
 one chooses is not feJt f 2. A guilty con- 
 science needs no accuser. 3. " After wit, 
 is every body's wit. 4. Enough is as 
 good as a feast. 5. All is but lip wis- 
 dom that wants experience. 6. Better 
 bend than break. 7. Children and fools 
 <>tten speak the truth. 8. Out of debt, 
 out of danger. 9. Wade not in un- 
 known waters. 10. Do what you ought, 
 and let come what will. 11. Empty 
 vessels make the greatest sound. 12. 
 Pause before you follow an example. 
 
 373. Style. The numerous exam- 
 ples ^iven throughout this work, aflbrd 
 t he necersary means for illustrating all 
 the principles of elocution : let the taste, 
 and judgment, as well as t*he abilities 
 Of the student— be tested by a proper 
 selection and application of them. He 
 must not expect too much from others, 
 nor take it unkindly, when thrown upon 
 his own resources : the best way to in- 
 
 4 * 
 
 crease our strength, is to have it often 
 tested. All who become orators must 
 make themselves orators. 
 
 Here is a back view of the pharynx 
 showing the relative position of the 
 base of the cranium (a),— mastoid pro 
 cess (b), — vertical position of the two 
 nasal fossae (c), — velum palati, making 
 part of the arch of the palate, with the 
 uvula projecting down from the middle; 
 base of the tongue (e), — extremity of 
 I the os hyoides (f),— opening of the glot- 
 tis where the vowels are shaped out (g) 
 , — portion of the trachea leading to the 
 'lungs (h), — commencement of the ce- 
 \ sophagus. or meat pipe (i), — one of the 
 j levator muscles of the pharynx at k. 
 374. Important questions. 1. If 
 we do well, shall we not be accepted? 
 
 2. Which is more useful, fire, or water? 
 
 3. Ousht circumstantial evidence to be ad- 
 mitted in criminal cases? 4. Can we 
 be too zealous in 'rightly promoting a 
 good cause? 5. Which is worse, a bad 
 education, or no education ? 6. Are not 
 bigotry and intolerance — as destructive 
 to morality, as they are to common sense ? 
 7. If the sculptor — could put lije into his 
 works } would he not resemble a good 
 Orator ? S. Are we not apt to be proud of 
 that which is not our own? 9. Ought 
 there not to be duties on imported goods, 
 to encourage domestic manufacturers ? 
 10. Is slavery ri^ht? 11. Have steam- 
 boats been the cau^e of more good than 
 
54 
 
 evil * 12. What was it, that made man 
 miserable, and what cam make him happy? 
 
 375. Style, &c To accomplish the 
 above, you must study the true mean- 
 ing and character of the subject, so as 
 to express the whole, in such a way as 
 to be perfectly understood and felt : thus, 
 you will transport your hearers to the 
 scene you describe, and your earnest- 
 ness raise them on the tiptoe of expec- 
 tation, and your just arguments sweep 
 every thing before them like a mountain 
 torrent : to excite, to agitate, and delight, 
 are among the most powerful arts of 
 persuasion: but the impressions must 
 be enforced on the mind by a command 
 of all the sensibilities and sympathies of 
 the soul. That your course may be ever 
 upward and onward, remember none but 
 a good man can be a perfect orator ; un- 
 corrupted and incorruptible integrity — is 
 one of the most powerful engines of 
 persuasion. 
 
 376. Music — is the oral language of 
 the Affections ; as words are the natural 
 language of the thoughts. The notes of 
 a tune are analogous to letters ; the 
 measures — to words ; the strains — to sen- 
 tences ; and the tune, or musical piece, 
 to a discourse, oration, or poem. As there 
 is a great variety of affections, and states 
 of affection in the human mind, so — there 
 is a great variety of tunes, through the 
 medium of which these affections, and 
 states of affection are manifested. There 
 are three grand divisions of Music, which 
 for the sake, of distinction, may be de- 
 nominated the upper, or that which re- 
 lates to the Supreme Being : the middle, 
 or that relating to created rational be- 
 ings, or social music; and the -lower, 
 or what appertains to that part of crea- 
 tion below man — called descriptive music. 
 
 377. There are also three great di- 
 visions in Poetry, which is closely al- 
 lied to music ; and both of them origi- 
 nate in the Will, or Affections : and 
 hence, the words of the Psalm, Hymn, 
 Poem, and the music in which they are 
 sung, chanted, or played, constitute the 
 forms, or mediums, through which the 
 affections and sentiments are bodied 
 forth. Is not genuine music from heav- 
 en ? and does it not lead there if not per- 
 verted? May not the same be said of 
 Poetry? Woe betide the person that 
 converts them into occasions of evil! 
 
 Musical and Poetical talents are fearful 
 gifts. Indeed, it is so with every talent ; 
 therefore, none should be abused, or 
 bound up in a napkin. 
 
 378. Vocal Music. In vocal music, 
 there is a union of music and language — 
 the language of affection and thought ; 
 which includes the whole man. Poe- 
 try and music are sister arts, their re- 
 lationship being one of heaven-like in- 
 timacy. The essence of poetry consists 
 in the fine perceptions, and vivid expres- 
 sions, of that subtle and mysterious 
 analogy, that exists between the physi- 
 cal and moral world ; and it derives its 
 power from the correspondence of natu- 
 ral things with spiritual. Its effect is 
 to elevate the thoughts toward a higher 
 state of existence. 
 
 379. Proverbs. 1. All truths mu si 
 not be told at all times. 2. A good ser- 
 vant makes a gojd master. 3. A man 
 in distress, or despair, does as much as 
 ten. 4. Before you make a friend, eat 
 a peck of salt with him. 5. Passion — 
 will master you, if you do not master 
 your passion. 6. Form— is good, but 
 notformality. 7. Every tub must stand 
 on its own bottom. 8. First come first . 
 served. 9. Friendship— cannot stand 
 all on one side. 10. Idleness — is the 
 hot-bed of vice and ignorance. 11. He 
 that will steal a pin will steal a better 
 thing. 12. If you lie upon roses when 
 young, you will lie upon thorns when old. 
 
 380. Manner and matter in Music. 
 The secret of success in Music, as w T ell 
 as in Elocution, is, to adapt the manner 
 perfectly to the matter ; if the subject 
 be simple, such must be the manner; 
 if it be gay and lively, or solemn and 
 dignified, such or such must be the man- 
 ner : in addition to which, the perform- 
 er must forget himself, or rather lose 
 himself in the subject, body and soul, 
 and show his regard to his audience, by 
 devoting hi mselfto the subject: and hence 
 he must never try to show himself off by 
 cadenzas, or what might be called the 
 " fixins," or gingerbread work : he must 
 hide behind the thought and feeling of 
 the music, and depend upon them to 
 produce the effect : il there is any affec- 
 tation, the hold on the heart is in that 
 proportion relinquished . Oh when shall 
 we take our appropriate place and re- 
 gard use as the grand object ! 
 
55 
 
 58 1 • By closely observing the move- 
 ments of the voice, when under the per- 
 fect command of the mind, you will see 
 that it changes its pitch, by leaps of one 
 or more notes, in passing from word to 
 word, and sometimes from syllable to 
 syllable, and also slides upwards and 
 downwards ; which skips and slides are 
 almost infinitely diversified, expressing 
 all the shades of thought and feeling, 
 and playing upon the minds of the lis- 
 teners, with a kind of supernatural pow- 
 er, the whole range of tunes from grave 
 to gay, from gentle to severe. The 
 worlds of mind and matcer are full of 
 music and oratory. 
 
 View of the Heart. 
 
 Here are seen the several chambers 
 of the heart and the vessels connected 
 with them. No. 1. is the superior vena 
 cava ; 2. inferior do. do; 3. the auricle; 
 4. right ventricle ; 5. line showing the 
 passage between the two chambers, and 
 the points of attachment of one margin 
 of the valve; 6. septum between the 
 ventricles ; 7. pulmonary artery, aris- 
 ing from -the left right ventricle, and di- 
 viding at 8 into right and left, for the 
 corresponding lungs ; 9. four pulmona- 
 ry veins, bringing the blood from the 
 lungs into 10, the left auricle; 11. left 
 ventricle ; 12. aorta, arising from the 
 left ventricle, and passing down behind 
 the heart, to distribute the blood to eve- 
 ry part of the system. The blood thus 
 moves in a double circle, one from the 
 heart to the body, and from the body 
 back to the heart, called the systemic 
 circle ; the other from the heart to the 
 lungs, and from thence to the heart, 
 called the pulmonic circle, 
 
 382. Proverbs. 1. A blythe heart 
 makes a blooming visage, 2. A deed 
 
 done has an end. 3. A great dty, & 
 great solitude. 4. Desperate cu*s inusx 
 have desperate cures. 5. All men are- 
 not men. 6. A stumble may prevent a 
 fall. 7. A fool always comes short of 
 his reckoning. 8. Beggars must not be 
 choosers. 9. Better late than never. 
 
 10. Birds of a feather flock together. 
 
 11. Nothing is lost in a good market. 
 
 12. All is well that ends well. 
 
 383. Eloquence. What were all 
 the attributes of man, his personal ac- 
 complishments, and his boasted reason* 
 without the faculty of Speech ? To ex- 
 cel in its use is the highest of human 
 arts. It enables man to govern whole- 
 nations, and to enchant, while he gov- 
 erns. The aristocracy of Eloquencr 
 is supreme, and in a free country, can 
 never be subdued. It is the pride of 
 peace, and the glory of war : it rides 
 upon the zephyr's wings, or thunders in 
 the storm. But there is in eloquence,, 
 in painting, the life of the canvass, which 
 breathes, moves, speaks : and is full of 
 action: so is there in the dance, the 
 poetry and music of motion, the elo- 
 quence of action ; whose power consists 
 in the wonderful adaptation of the gra- 
 ces of the body to the harmonies of mind. 
 There is, indeed, eloquence in every ob- 
 ject of taste, both in art and nature ; in 
 sculpture, gardening, architecture, poe- 
 try and music ; all of which come with- 
 in the scope and plan of the orator, that 
 he may comprehend that intellectual re- 
 lation, that secret clause in the- liberal 
 professions, which, connecting one with 
 another, combines the influence of all. 
 
 384. Important questions. 1. Is any 
 govengtaent— as important as the prin- 
 ciples it should protect and extend ? 2. 
 Should we remain passive, when our 
 country, or political rights are invaded T 
 3 Are banks beneficial? 4. Have the 
 crusades been the* cause of more evil 
 than good? 5. Is the war waged 
 against the Seminoles of Florida, just? 
 6. Which is the more important acquis- 
 ition w r ealth, or knowledge ? 7.. Is there 
 any neutral ground between good and 
 evil, truth and falsehood? 8^.. Which 
 should we fear most— the commission 
 of a crime, or the fear of punishment * 
 9. By blinding the understanding, and 
 forcing the judgment, can we mend th* 
 heart ? 10. When proud people meet 
 
56 
 
 together, are they not always unhappy ? 
 11. Is not common sense a very rare 
 ojid valuable article? 12. What is the 
 use of a body without a soul ? 
 
 385. Here are two attitudes, active 
 and passive, standing and sitting : and 
 much depends upon the state of the 
 muscles in both. Beware of too much 
 stiffness and too much laxity j be natu- 
 ral and easy. Avoid leaning, either 
 backwards or forwards, to the right or 
 left. Many have caused a projection of 
 the shoulders, and induced spinal affec- 
 tions, by lifting one another, to see who 
 would lift the most : as well as by wrong 
 positions in standing and sitting : be- 
 
 * ware of every thing that is improper. 
 
 386. Proverbs. 1. A crowd is not 
 company. 2. A drowning man w r ill 
 satch at a straw. 3. Half a loaf is bet- 
 ter than no bread. 4. An ill workman 
 quarrels with his tools. 5. Better be 
 alone than in bad company. 6. Count 
 not your chickens before they are hatch- 
 ed. 7. Everybody's business, is no- 
 body's business. 8. Fools maW feasts, 
 and wise men eat them. 9. He that 
 will not be counselled, cannot be helped. 
 10. If it were not for hope, the heart 
 would break. 11. Kindness will creep, 
 when it cannot walk. 12. Oil and truth 
 will get uppermost at last. 
 
 387. A spelling Anecdote. A 
 laughable circumstance took place, at a 
 trial in Lancashire, where the head of 
 the family was examined as a witness. 
 Upon giving his name, the Judge, not 
 being able to pronounce it, said to him, 
 < ; Pray sir how do you spell it." The 
 old gentleman replied, double T, I 
 double U, E double L, double U double 
 O P. Whereupon the astonished law- 
 
 giver laid down his pen saying, "it was 
 the most extraordinary name he had 
 ever met with in his life ;" and after 
 several attempts, declared he was una- 
 ble to record it. What was his name ? 
 388. Proverbs. 1. A calumny, tho' 
 known to be such, generally leaves a 
 stain on the reputation. 2. A blow from 
 a frying pan, tho' it does not hurt, sul- 
 lies. 3. Fair and softly, go sure and jar. 
 4. Keep your business and conscience 
 well, and they will be sure to keep you 
 well. o. A man knows no more, to any 
 purpose, than he practices. 6, Bells call 
 others to church, but enter not themselves, 
 
 7. Revenue a wrong by forgiving it. 
 
 8. Venture not all you have at once. 
 
 9. Examine your accounts and your con- 
 duct every night. 10. Call me cousin, 
 
 i but don't cozen me. 11. Eagles — fly 
 ' alone, but sheep Hock together. 12. It 
 is good to begin well, but better to uul 
 I well. 
 
 ' 389. The Human Voice. Among 
 j all the wonderful varieties of artificial 
 instruments, which discourse excellent 
 music, where shall we find one that can 
 ! be compared to the human voice ? And 
 where can we find an instrument com- 
 parable to the human mind ? upon 
 , w r hose stops the real musician, the poet, 
 | and the orator, sometimes lays his hands, 
 ; and avails himself of the entire compass 
 ! of its magnificent capacities ? Oh ! the 
 length, the breadth, the height, and the 
 depth of Music and Eloquence ! They 
 are high as heaven, deep as hell, and 
 broad as the universe. 
 
 390. Important Questions. l.Were 
 any beings ever created angels ? 2. Is 
 it right ever to do wrong ? 3. Why was 
 a revelation necessary ? 4. May we not 
 protect our person and character from 
 assault ? 5. Does civilization increase 
 happiness ? 6. Which excites more cu- 
 riosity, the works of nature, or of art ? 
 1 7. Ought a witness to be questioned 
 ! with regard to his religious opinions, or 
 belief? 8. Is the general bankrupt law 
 a benefit to the country? 9. Why are 
 | we disposed to laugh, ^even when our 
 | best frien d falls down ? 10. Which is 
 i the greatest, Faith, Hope, or Charity ? 
 j 11. Should controversy interrupt our 
 i friendship and esteem for each other ? 
 12. Have Christians any right to perse- 
 cute each other for their opinions ? 
 
57 
 
 39 1 • Poetry may be written in rhyme, 
 or blank verse. Khyme is the corres- 
 pondence of sounds, in the ending of 
 two (or more) successive; or alternate 
 words or syllables of two or more lines, 
 forming a couplet or triplet : see the 
 various examples given. Rythmus 
 in the poetic art, means the relative du- 
 ration of the time occupied in pronoun- 
 cing the syllables ; in the art of music 
 it signifies the relative duration of the 
 sound that enter into the musical compo- 
 sition : see measures of speech and song. 
 
 392. Proverbs. 1. A thousand- 
 probabilities will not make one truth. 
 2. A hand-saw is a good thing, but not 
 to shave with. 3. Gentility, without 
 ability, is worse than beggary. 4. A 
 man may talk like a wise man, and yet 
 act like a fool. 5. If we would succeed 
 in any thing, we must use the proper 
 means. 6. A liar should have a good 
 memory. 7. Charity, begins at home ; 
 but does not end there. 8. An ounce of 
 inqther wit is worth a pound of learning. 
 
 9. Short reckonings make long friends. 
 
 10. Custom is the plague of wise men, 
 and the idol of fools. 11. Every one 
 knows best where his own shoe pinches. 
 12. A faint heart never won a fair lady. 
 
 393. The author is perfectly satis- 
 fied that most of his predecessors x have 
 depended entirely too much upon the 
 inflections to produce variety, instead 
 of upon the intonatiuns of the voice : the 
 former invariably makes mechanical 
 readers and speakers • while the latter, 
 being founded in nature, makes the re- 
 verse : the one is of the head, and is the 
 result of thought and calculation : and 
 the other of the heart, and is the sponta- 
 neous effusion of the affections : the 
 former spreads a veil before the mind ; 
 the latter takes it away. Is it not so ? 
 Choose ye. Nature knows agreat deal 
 more than art ; listen to her teachings 
 and her verdict. 
 
 394. VARIETIES, garrick. It 
 is believed that this tragedian greatly 
 surpassed all his predecessors, in his 
 genius for acting, in the sweetness and 
 variety of his tones, the irresistable 
 magic of his eye, the fire and vivacity 
 of his action, the elegance of his atti- 
 tudes, and the whole pathos of expres- 
 sion. The cause of which success was, 
 his intimate and practical knowledge of 
 
 human nature. An anecdote in ptrixt- 
 A certain Lord, on his return from the 
 theatre, being anxious to know what 
 impression Garrick's acting had made- 
 upon his postillion, (who sat in his pri* 
 vate box with his master,) asked him 
 what he thought of the great Mr .Garrick? 
 Think of him, my lord ? I think he acted 
 just like John and I in the stable. When* 
 this answer was repeated to the tragedi- 
 an, he declared it was the highest com- 
 pliment he ever had paid him ; for, said 
 he, if nature's own children can't dis- 
 tinguish me from themselves, it is a 
 pretty sure indication that I am right. 
 
 395. The uses of eloquence. In 
 every situation, in all the pursuits of 
 life, may be seen the usefulness and 
 benefits of eloquence. There is no con* 
 dition, however low, tnat they cannot 
 dignify ; no elevation however high that 
 they cannot exalt. In whatever light 
 we view this subject, it is evident that 
 oratory is not a mere castle in the air ; 
 a fairy palace of fret-work ; destitute of 
 substance and support. It is like a 
 magnificent Temple of Parian marble, 
 exhibiting the most exact and admirable 
 symmetry, and combining all the orders, 
 varieties, and beauties of Architecture. 
 
 396. Varieties. 1. Duty sounds 
 sweetly, to those who are in the love, 
 and under the influence of truth and 
 goodness : its path does not lead thro r 
 thorny places, and over cheerless 
 wastes; but winds pleasantly, amid 
 green meadows and shady groves. 2. 
 A new truth is to some, as impossible 
 of discovery, as the new world was to 
 the faithless cotemporaries of Colum- 
 bus ; they do not believe in such a thing; 
 and more than this they will not believe 
 in it : yet they will sit in judgment on 
 those who do believe in such a contra- 
 band article, as new truths, and con- 
 demn them without mercy. 
 
 397. Anecdote. Tallow and Tal- 
 ent. Fletcher, bishop of Nesmes, was 
 the son of a tallow chandler. A great 
 duke once endeavored to mortify the pre- 
 late, by saying to him, at the king's fo- 
 vee, that he smelt of tallow. To which 
 the bishop replied, " My lord 1 am the 
 son of a chandler, it is true, — and if 
 your lordship had been the same, you 
 would have remained a chandler all tha 
 days of your life. 
 
58 
 
 398. Obs. The orator's field is the, 
 nni verse of mind and matter, and his 
 subjects, — all that is known of God and 
 man. Study the principles of things, 
 and never rest satisfied with the results 
 and applications. All distinguished 
 speakers, whether they ever paid any 
 systematic attention to the principles of 
 elocution or not, in their most successful 
 efforts, conform to them ; and their im- 
 perfections are the results of deviations 
 from these principles. Think correct- 
 ly — rather than finely ; sound conclu- 
 sions are much better than beautiful 
 conceptions. Be useful, rather than 
 showy, and speak to the purpose, or 
 not speak at all. Persons become emi- 
 nent, by the force of mind — the power 
 of thinking comprehensively, deeply, 
 closely, usefully. Rest more on the 
 thought, feeling, and expression, than 
 on the style 5 for language is like the 
 atmosphere — a medium of vision, in- 
 tended not to be seen itself, but to make 
 other objects seen ; the more transpa- 
 rent however, the better. 
 
 399. To learn almost any art, or 
 science, appears arduous, or difficult, at 
 first ; but if we have a heart for any 
 work, it soon becomes comparatively 
 easy. To make a common watch, or a 
 watch w r orn in a ring ; to sail over the 
 vast ocean, &c. seems at first, almost 
 impossible ; yet they are constantly 
 practised. The grand secret of simpli- 
 fying a science is analyzing it ; in be- 
 ginning with what is easy, and proceed- 
 ing to the combinations : by this meth- 
 od, miracles may be wrought : the hill 
 of science must be ascended step by 
 step. 
 
 400. The Blood. The quantity of 
 blood, existing in the body of a moder- 
 ately sized man, is from fifteen to twen- 
 ty quarts ; an ounce and a half, (about 
 three table spoonfuls) is sent out every 
 time the heart beats ; which, multiplied 
 by 75, (the average rate of the pulse per 
 minute,) gives 112J ounces ; or 7 pints 
 a minute ; i.e. 420 pints, or 50 gal- 
 lons an hour,— 1260 gallons, i. e. forty- 
 two barrels, or 10J hogshead in a day. 
 f/In a common sized whale, the quanti- 
 ty circulated thro' the heart in a day, is 
 estimated, upon similar principles to be 
 452,000 gallons ; i. e. 14,400 barrels ; 
 or 3,600 hogsheads.'' ; 
 
 401. Anecdote illustrative of 
 memory. Our thoughts are real existen- 
 ces, and are as indestructible as the 
 mind : they may fade away, apparent- 
 ly, but yet they are stored up in the in- 
 terior memory, (we have two memories, 
 external and internal, the former for 
 words and the latter for thoughts,) and 
 afterwards come forth in perfectly dis- 
 tinct and individual remembrance. The 
 following anecdote confirms and illus- 
 trates the proposition. In Gottingen, 
 Germany, a woman of four or five and 
 twenty, who could neither read nor 
 write, was seized with a nervous fever ; 
 during which, she would talk in Latin, 
 Greek and Hebrew, in pompous tone's 
 and w T ith distinct articulation. Many 
 of her 'recitations were taken down, 
 and found to consist of coherent and in- 
 telligent sentences. A young physician 
 determined to trace out her past life, and 
 find a solution to this strange phenom- 
 enon : he did so ; and ascertained, that 
 for many of her earlier years, she resi- 
 ded with a clergyman, whose custom it 
 was to walk up and down his hall, into 
 which his kitchen door opened, and 
 read in a loud voice, out of his favorite 
 classical books. The physician succeed- 
 ed in finding some of the books, in 
 which the identical passages, given by 
 the sick moman were found. 
 
 Here is the trunk of a large vein, open- 
 ed to show the valves formed by the folds 
 
59 
 
 of its internal membrane; b, valves, their 
 concavity directed towards the heart ; 
 c, venous twigs anastomosing and uni- 
 ting to form a large branch, d, which 
 opens into the principal trunk at e. 
 These valves prevent the blood from 
 flowing back to the capillaries, and fa- 
 cilitate its passage to the heart : there 
 are similar valves in the arteries ; but 
 the blood flows slower in the veins than 
 in the arteries. 
 
 402. Whitfield. Dr. Franklin re- 
 lates the following, as characteristic of 
 this celebrated preacher and himself. 
 "I attended one of his sermons, in the 
 course of which I perceived he intended 
 to finish with a collection : and I silent- 
 ly resolved he should get nothing from 
 me. I had in my pocket a handful of 
 copper money, three or four silver dol- 
 lars, and five pistoles in gold. As he 
 proceeded, I began to soften, and con- 
 cluded to give the copper. Another 
 stroke of his oratory made me ashamed 
 of that, and determined me to give the 
 silver ; and he finished so admirably 
 that I emptied my pocket wholly into the 
 collector's dish, gold and all. At this 
 sermon there was also one of our com- 
 pany ; who, being of my sentiments 
 respecting the building in Georgia, and 
 suspecting a collection might be inten- 
 ded, had, by precaution, emptied his 
 pockets before he came from home ; 
 towards the close of the discourse, he 
 felt a strong inclination to give, and ap- 
 plied to a neighbor, who sat near him, 
 to lend him some money for the pur- 
 pose. The request was fortunately 
 made to perhaps the only man in the 
 company, who had the firmness not to 
 be affected by the preacher. His answer 
 was "at any other time." 
 
 403. Our two memories. This, to 
 some, may seem a singular doctrine / 
 nevertheless it is true ; and being insep- 
 arably connected with the uses of the 
 elocutionist, I will enlarge a little up- 
 on the subject. FirsLiromEXPERiENcE. 
 For several years aJj| I commenced 
 teaching elocution, I JRe no recitations 
 of any length, the principal reason was, 
 I could not memorize with any facility, 
 or declaim, without great mental effort. 
 At length, after investigating the sub- 
 ject of mind, I saw and felt, that there 
 were two memories; oru for thoughts, 
 
 which is interior, and proper to the 
 spirit 5 and the other, for words, which is 
 exterior y and proper to the body. Illus- 
 tration. All nations, with their 
 mind's eye, i.e. in their thought, see 
 things alike, so far as their respective 
 states of cultivation will permit. A 
 German, an Italian, a Frenchman, an 
 Englishman, &c. being present, see a 
 house, and they think of it in the same 
 manner : but when each would convey 
 his idea to one of his own countrymen, 
 he would clothe it in a German, Italian. 
 French or English dress : so in other 
 cases. Thus, to the external memory, 
 belong all expressions of languages, ob- 
 jects of the senses, and the arts and 
 sciences ; to the interior appertain in 
 part, all rational things from the ideas 
 of which thought itself exists. 
 
 404. Conundrums, or quibbles. 1. 
 Why is a drunken man, like a windmill ? 
 Because his head turns round. 2. Why 
 is a thinking man like a mirror ? Be- 
 cause he reflects. 3. Why is the human 
 mind like a garden ? Because you may 
 sow what seeds you please in it. 4. Why 
 is swearing, like a ragged coat ? Be- 
 cause it is a bad habit. 5. Why is re- 
 bellion, like dram-drinking ? Because 
 it is inimical to the Constitution. 6. Why 
 is a man led astray, like one governed 
 by a girl ? Do you give it up ? Because 
 he is misled— (Miss-led.) 7. What is 
 that which makes every body sick, but 
 those w r ho swallow it? Flattery, b. 
 Which side of a pitcher is the handle ? 
 The outside? 9. Why do white sheep, 
 furnish more wool than black ones? 
 Because there are more of them. 10, 
 Why is a tale-bearer like a brick-layer? 
 Do you give it up? Because he raise? 
 stories. 
 
 405* Ventriloquism. In analyzing 
 the sounds of our letters, and practising 
 them upon different pitches, and with 
 different qualities of voice, the writer 
 ascertained that this amusing art can 
 be acquired and practised, by almost 
 any one of common organization. It 
 has been generally supposed that Ven- 
 triloquists possessed a different set of 
 organs from most people ; or, at least, 
 that they were differently constituted ;. 
 but this is altogether a misapprehension : 
 as well might we say that the singer is 
 differently constituted from one who 
 
60 
 
 «foe$. not sing. They have the same 
 organs, but one has better command of 
 them than the other. It is not asserted 
 that all can become equally eminent in 
 *hese arts ; for there will be at least, 
 three grand divisions : viz, good, better 
 and BEST. 
 
 406. The two memories: Inferences. 
 Hence, while in the material world, we 
 are obliged to converse in material lan- 
 guages, distinguished into articulate 
 sounds, which constitute the clothing of 
 the thoughts, which are of the spirit: 
 which is done from the exterior memo- 
 ry, or storehouse of words, or ward- 
 robe for the clothing of our ideas. When 
 we emerge from materiality, into the 
 mental, or spiritual world, (where mind 
 ever dwells, even while connected with 
 the body,) we shall see as we are seen, 
 and know as we are known, and be in 
 possession of a universal language, dis- 
 tinguished into ideas ; so that all na- 
 tions, and people— can converse, instan- 
 taneously, with each other; because 
 they do it from the interior memory, 
 appertaining to the spirit. In this mem- 
 ory are inscribed— all that the mind has 
 thought, spoken, or done thro' the body. 
 Is not this the Book of Life, which is 
 hereafter to be opened ? But this is a 
 £reat, important, and practical subject, 
 and requires a volume, to treat it satis- 
 factorily. We are compelled to abridge 
 tvery thing for want of room. Let the 
 student be determined to break thro' 
 the trammels of prejudice, error and 
 lad habits, and exercise his own reason, 
 taste and judgment; let him dive into 
 the depths of every thing— understand all, 
 think for himself, and build on his own 
 foundation. 
 
 407. Varieties. Some discourses 
 and orations, are nothing but flesh and 
 frlood, without bone, nerve, or joint; 
 ■others are all bone, nerve and joints, 
 without either flesh or blood. The per- 
 fection of good writing, consists in the 
 proper assemblage of all the principles 
 which correspond with these grand parts 
 of the human body: and the perfection I 
 of delivery, consists in infusing all the 
 powers and faculties of the human soul 
 into those of the body .2. A great mind 
 can attend to little things ; but a little 
 mind cannot attend to great things. 3. | 
 The best descriptions of real life are to l 
 
 be learned from the human heart : in 
 which are found the seeds of every pas* 
 sion. 
 
 408. Diffidence. The best speakers, 
 they who speak with the greatest ease 
 and effect, are always somewhat timid 
 and confused, when they first com- 
 mence ; nor can they be otherwise : for 
 the more a man excels in oratory, the 
 more sensible is he of its difficulty : be- 
 sides, he is concerned for the event of 
 his effort, as well as to meet the ex- 
 pectation of his audience. Some ora- 
 tors turn pale at the beginning, feel a 
 heaviness of heatf, a flutter all over 
 their spirits, and a trembling through 
 every joint : this was the case with Ci- 
 cero, at times ; and on one occasion, the 
 court adjourned on account of it. Be- 
 ware of a slavish fear, which is abso- 
 lutely sinful, and gird up the loins of 
 the mind to every conflict. 
 
 409. The name of Ventriloquism 
 is given, in consequence of the origin of 
 the effort to practice the art; venter and 
 loquor, speaking from the abdominal 
 region : for all vocal sounds are made 
 in the larynx. It might be appropri- 
 ately called Vocal Modulation, or Vo- 
 cal Illusion ; rather than miscalled 
 Ventriloquism : as those who success- 
 fully practice it, invariably possess the 
 power of imitating, with their voice, the 
 voices of others, as well as the cries of 
 animals, and the sounds of inanimate 
 matter : indeed, one may imitate 
 any sound that comes within the com- 
 pass of his voice ; which should be at 
 least, three octaves for every one, male 
 and female ; and there are some, who 
 have a compass of four octaves, and a 
 few, (among whom is the author,) of 
 five octaves of sound. 
 
 410. Varieties. Against slander, 
 there is no defence ; hell itself— cannot 
 boast so foul a fiend, or man deplore' a 
 fouler foe. It starts with a word— a 
 look— a shrug. It is the pestilence that 
 walketh in darkness ; the heart-reachii.g 
 dagger of the mi^toght assassin ; mur- 
 der is its empl^pient, innocence its 
 prey, and ruin its support. 2. In con- 
 versation, be more particular in 'speak- 
 ing of things than of persons: the for- 
 mer tends to improve and elevate the 
 thoughts and feelings ; the latter to 
 sink and degrade them. 3. The true 
 
61 
 
 question at issue is — Whether the thea- 
 tre as it now exists, and ever has exist- 
 ed — is an evil or a benefit, to the com- 
 munity ? 4. Nobility in England, is ex- 
 tended to only five ranks ; viz : the 
 Duke, the Marquis, the Earl, Viscount, 
 and Baron. 5. Some are thought to be 
 very great and wonderful men, because 
 their readers and hearers cannot under- 
 stand them. 
 
 411. The art of ventriloquism seems 
 to have been much more practiced for- 
 merly than it is at present ; the less peo- 
 ple reason, the more probability of suc- 
 cessful deception : the whole art being 
 built on apparent truth, instead of real 
 truth. It was known to the Egyptians, 
 the Assyrians, the Greeks and Jews. 
 In the Bible we read of magicians, vviz- 
 zards, tec., which are thought by some, 
 to have reference to this art : and it 
 would have been very easy, for those 
 who were appointed to consult, and re- 
 ceive answers from the ancient oracles, 
 to deceive the applicants, by speaking 
 ventriloquially ; the attention being di- 
 rected to the object of solicitude, which 
 moved its lips and sometimes its head: 
 and all in conformity with experience 
 and observation. 
 
 Here is the larynx, or 
 vocal box, in connection 
 ..with the os hy nicks (h,) 
 c its walls are formed 
 by cartilaginous plates 
 called the thyroid car- 
 tilage (t) the cricoid 
 cartilage (c)and the arit- 
 enoid cartilages ; Ad- 
 am's apple is seen at a. In the next 
 engraving is a different 
 ''e view of the larynx, fcc, 
 h— os hyotdes ; t thyroid 
 cartilage ; c. c. cricoid 
 ^a cartilage -, a — aritenoid 
 
 m v cartilage ; v — ventri- 
 
 ■w cle of the glottis ; formed 
 \rbythe space left be- 
 tween the vocal cords 
 and the superior liga- 
 ments of the glottis ; t — epiglottis, 
 which closes when we swallow any 
 *hing. 
 
 412, Proverbs, 1. Affairs like salt 
 fish should be a long time soaking. 2. 
 A fool's tongue is long enoueh to cut his 
 
 own throat. 3. Allare not thieves that 
 dogs bark at. 4. An ant may work his 
 heart out, but it can never make honey. 5. 
 Better go around than fall into the ditch. 
 6. Church work generally goes on slow- 
 ly. 7. Those whom guilt contaminates 
 it renders equal. 8. Force without fore- 
 cast is little worth. 9. Gentility with- 
 out ability, is worse than plain beggary. 
 
 TRANQUILITY, &c. 
 
 413, Tranquility appears by the open 
 and composed countenance, and a gen- 
 eral repose of the whole body ; month 
 nearly closed ; eyebrows a little arched ; 
 forehead smooth ; eyes passing, with an 
 easy motion, from one object to another, 
 but not dwelling long on any ; cast of 
 happiness bordering on cheerfulness ; 
 desiring to please and be pleased ; gaity, 
 good humor, when the mouth opens a 
 little more. 
 
 414. Cheerfulness in Retirement. 
 Now my co- mates, and brothers in exile , 
 Hath not old custom made this life more 
 sweet Than that of painted pomp ? Are 
 not these woods — More free from peril 
 than the -envious court ? Here — feel 
 we but the penalty of Adam. The sea- 
 son's difference; os the icy fang, ,*nd 
 churlish chiding of the winter's wind. 
 Which, when it bites and blows upon my 
 body, Ev'n till I shrink with cold, I 
 smile and say. This is no flat 1 try ,- these 
 are counsellors — That feelingly persuade 
 me what I am : Sweet— are the nses <. ." 
 adversity, That, like a toad, ugly and 
 venomous, Wears yet a precious jewel 
 ia its head ; And this our /»/*. exemi [ 
 from public haunts. Finds tsngues, r 
 trees, boohs, in running r> rocks. s*i mw.s 
 in s'foarr.s, and good in tury ikin^. 
 
62 
 
 JOY; DELIGHT. 
 
 415. Joy— a pleasing elation of mind 
 on the actual or assured attainment of 
 good ; or deliverance from some evil. 
 When moderate, it opens the counten- 
 ance with smiles, and throws a sunshine 
 of delectation over the whole frame ; 
 when sudden and violent it is expressed 
 by clapping the hands, exultation and 
 weeping, raising the eyes to heaven, 
 and perhaps suffusing them with tears, 
 and giving such a spring to the body, 
 as to make attempts to mount up as if it 
 could fly: and when it is extreme, goes 
 into transport,rapture,andecstacy ; voice 
 often raises on very high pitches, and 
 exhilirating j it has a wildness of look 
 and gesture that borders on folly, mad- 
 ness and sorrow ; hence the expression, 
 "frantic with joy." Joy, Mirth, (fee, 
 produce a rousing, exciting, lively ac- 
 tion. 
 
 416. Joy expected. 1. Ah! Juliet, 
 if the measure of thy joy — Be heaped, 
 like mine, and that thy skill be more To 
 blazen it, then sweeten, with thy breath, 
 This neighbor air, and let rich music's 
 tongue Unfold the imagin'd happiness — 
 that both receive, in either, by this dear 
 encounter. 2. Delight on viewing a statue. 
 See ! my lord, Would you not deem it 
 breath'' d, and that those veins Did verily 
 bear blood ? sweet Paulina, make me 
 think so twenty years together ; No 
 settled senses of the world, can match 
 the 'pleasure, of that madness. 
 
 Proverbs.— 1. Hot love is soon cold. 
 2. Gold goes in at any gate except 
 Heaven's gate. 3. He that stays in 
 the valley shall never get over the hill. 
 4. Human blood is all of one color. 5. 
 If we like to le good, we shall be. 
 
 % 
 
 MIRTH, JOLLY LAUGHTER. 
 
 417. When delight arises irom ludi- 
 crous or fugitive amusements, in which 
 others share with us, it is called mirth, 
 
 LAUGHTER, Or MERRIMENT; which Opens 
 
 the mouth horizontally, shrivels the nose, 
 raises the cheeks high, lessens the ap- 
 erture of the eyes, and fills it with tears. 
 
 418. Invocation of the goddess of 
 Mirth. But come, thou goddess, fair 
 and free, Tn heav'n, yclep'd Eu-p/zos-y- 
 ne, And of men — heart-easing Mirth'; 
 Whom lovely Venus bore j Comt, thou 
 nymph, and bring with thee Mirth, and 
 youthful Johty ; Quips, and cranks, and 
 wanton wiles, Nods, and beckz, and 
 wreathed smiles ; Such as hang on Hebe's 
 cheek, and love to live in dimples sleek : 
 sport, that wrinkled care derides, And 
 Laughter — holdingboth his sides ; come 
 and trip it as ye go, On the light fantas- 
 ti: toe ; And in thy right hand — bring 
 with thee — The mountain nymph — sweet 
 Liberty. 
 
 ECSTACY, RAPTURE, &c. 
 419. Ecstacy, Rapture, Transport, 
 express an extraordinary elevation of 
 
63 
 
 the spirits, an excessive tension of mind : 
 they signify to be out of one's self, oat 
 af one's mind, carried away beyond one's 
 self. Ecstacy— benumbs the faculties, 
 takes away the power of speech, and 
 sometimes of thought ; it is generally 
 occasioned by sudden and unexpected 
 events : but rapture often invigorates 
 the powers and calls them into action. 
 The former, is common to all persons of 
 ardent feelings ; especially, children &c, 
 the illiterate ; the latter is common to 
 persons of superior minds, and circum- 
 stances of peculiar importance. 
 
 420. 1. What followed, was all ec- 
 "stacy, and trances : Immortal pleasures — 
 round my swimming eyes did dance. 2. 
 By swift degrees, the love of nature 
 works, And warms the bosom, till at 
 last sublim'd To rapture and enthus'as- 
 tic heat, We feel the present Deity 3. 
 Scorns the base earth and crowd below, 
 And. with a peering wing, still mounts 
 on high, 4. He plaifd so sweetly, end 
 so sweetly sung, That on each note the 
 enraptur'd audience hung. 
 
 various, musical, and rapturous as in 
 Joy : when declaring, the right hand, 
 open, is pressed forcibly on the breast ; 
 it makes approaches with the greatest 
 delicacy, and is attended with trembling 
 hesitancy and confusion; if successful, 
 the countenance is lighted up with smiles; 
 wttsuccessful love adds an air of anxiety 
 and melancholy. 
 
 422. To the above may be added, 
 Shakspeare's description of this affec- 
 tion, as given by the Good Shepherd, 
 who was requested to tell a certain 
 youth what 'tis to love. "It is to be 
 made of phantasy ; All made of passion, 
 and all made of wishes : All adoration, 
 duty, and obedience ; All humbleness, 
 all patience and ^patience : All purity, 
 all trial, all observance." Love describ- 
 ed. Come hither boy ; if ever thou shalt 
 love, in the sweet pangs of it remember 
 me : For such as I am — all — true lov- 
 ers are : Unstaid and skittish in all mo- 
 tions else ; Save in the constant image 
 of the creature that is belov'd. 
 
 423. Languishing Love. 1. fel- 
 low, come, the song we had last night : 
 Mark it Cesario ; it is old and plain ; 
 The Spinsters, and the knitters in the 
 sun, And the free maids, that wave 
 their threads with bones, Do use to chant 
 it ; it is silly sooth, And dallies with the 
 innocence of love, Like to old age. 
 
 LOVE, fee. 
 421. Love— gives a soft serenity to 
 the countenance, a languishing to the 
 eyes, a sweetness to the voice, and a ten- 
 derness to the whole frame : forehead 
 smooth and enlarged ; eye-brows arch- 
 ed ; mouth a little open ; when entreat- 
 ing, it clasps the hands, with interming- 
 led fingers, to the breast ; eyes languish- 
 ing and partly shut, as if doating on the 
 beloved object ; countenance assumes 
 the eager and wistful look of desire, 
 but mixed with an air of satisfaction 
 and repose ; accents soft and winning, 
 voice persuasive, flattering, pathetic, 
 
 PITY, COMPASSION. 
 424. Pity— benevolence to the afflic- 
 ted; a mixture of love for an object which 
 suffers, whether human or animal, and 
 a grief that we are unable to remove those 
 sufferings. It is seen in a compassion- 
 ate tenderness of voice; a feeling of 
 pain in the countenance ; features drawn 
 together, eye-brows drav n down, mouth 
 
64 
 
 open, and a gentle raising and falling of 
 the hands and eyes ; as if mourning 
 over the unhappy object. 
 
 425 . Hadst thou but seen, as / did, 
 how at last, thy beauties, Belvidera, like 
 a wretch — That's doom'd to banishment, 
 came weeping forth : Whils't two young 
 virgins, on whom she once leaned, Kind- 
 ly look'd up, and at her grief grew sad ! 
 Ev'n the loud rabble, th't were gather'd 
 round — To see the sight, stood mute, 
 when they beheld her ; govern* d their 
 roaring threats, and grumbled pity. 
 
 426* Pity. 1. But from the moun- 
 tain's grassy side, A guiltless feast I 
 bring : A script, with fruits and herbs 
 supplied, And water from the spring. 2. 
 How many bled, By shameless variance, 
 between man and man ! 3. On the 
 bare earth, exposed, he lies, With not a 
 friend to . close his eyes. 4. He that's 
 merciful unto the bad, is cruel to the 
 good. 5. Life, fill'd with grief's distress- 
 ful train, Forever asks the tear humane. 
 
 forcibly than usual, in order to express 
 our desires more strongly, and our earn- 
 est expectation of receiving the object 
 of them. 
 
 428. Picture of Hope. L But 
 thou, hope ! with eyes so fair. What 
 was thy delighted measure? Still it 
 whisper'd — promis'd pleasure, And bader 
 the lovely scenes at distance hail; Stili 
 would her touch the strain prolong, 
 And from the rocks, the woods, the vale, 
 She called an echo still thro' all her 
 song; And where her sweetest theme 
 she chose, A soft, responsive voice was 
 heard, at every close, And Hope, en- 
 chanted, smil'd, and waived her golden 
 hair. 
 
 DESIRE, HOPE. 
 427. Hope —is a mixture of joy and 
 ^desire, agitating the mind, and antici- 
 pating its enjoyment ; it ever gives 
 pleasure ; which is not always the case 
 "with wish and desire ; as they may pro- 
 duce or foe accompanied with pain and 
 anxiety. Hope erects and brightens 
 the countenance, opens the mouth to half 
 u smile, a ches the eye-brows, gives the 
 eyes an eager and wistful look ; spreads 
 the arms with the hands open, ready to 
 receive the object of its wishes, towards 
 which it leans a little ; the voice is some- 
 what plaintive, and manner inclining to 
 eagerness, 1. ; ' coloured by doubt and 
 anxietv ; the breath drawn inward more 
 
 HATRED, AVERSION. , 
 
 429, When, by frequent reflections 
 on a disagreeable object, our disappro- 
 bation of it is attended with a strong 
 disinclination of mind towards it, it is 
 called hatred ; and when this is accom- 
 panied with a painful sensation upon the 
 apprehension of its presence and ap- 
 proach, there follows an inclination to 
 avoid it, called aversion : extreme ha- 
 tred is abhorrence, or detestation. 
 
 430. Hatred, or aversion expressed 
 to, or of any person, or any thing, that 
 is odious, draws back the body to avoid 
 the hated object, and the hands, at the 
 same time, thrown out and spread, as if 
 to keep it off; the face is turned away 
 from that side which the hands are 
 thrown out ; the eyes looking angrily 
 and obliquely, or asquint, the way the 
 hands are directed, the eye-brows atft 
 contracted, the upper lip disdainfully 
 drawn up; the teeth set; the pitch of 
 the voice is loud, surly, chiding, iangmd 
 
65 
 
 and vehement ; the sentences are short 
 and abrupt. Hatred— cursing the ob- 
 ject hatred. Poisons — be their drink, 
 Gall — worse than gall, the daintest meat 
 they taste. Their sweetest shade, a 
 grave of Cyprus trees. Their sweetest 
 prospects, murd'ring basalisks ; Their 
 music — frightful as the serpent's hiss. 
 And boding screech -owls make the con- 
 cert full ; All the foul terrors of dark 
 seated hell. 
 
 times, to express anger with uncommon 
 energy, the voice assumes a low and 
 forcible tone. 
 
 433. Ex. Hear me, rash man,- on 
 thy allegiance hear me j Since thou hast 
 striven to make us break our vow, 
 Which, nor our nature, nor our place 
 can bear, We banish thee forever from 
 our sight, And our kingdom : If when 
 three days are expired, Thy hated trunk 
 be found in our dominions. That moment 
 is thy death : — Away. 
 
 ANGER, RAGE, FURY; 
 
 431. Which imply excitement or 
 violent action ; when hatred and dis- 
 pleasure rise high, on a sudden, from an 
 apprehension of injury received and 
 perturbation of mind in consequence of 
 it, it is called anger : and rising to a 
 very high degree, and extinguishing 
 humanity, it becomes rage and fury : 
 anger always renders the muscles pro- 
 tuberant ; hence, on angry mind and 
 protuberant muscles are considered as 
 cause and effect. 
 
 432. Violent anger or rage, express- 
 es itself with rapidity, noise, harshness, 
 trepidation, and sometimes with inter- 
 ruption and hesitation, as unable to utter 
 itself with sufficient force. It wrinkles 
 and elouds the brow, enlarges and 
 heaves the nostrils ; every vein swells, 
 muscles strained, nods or shakes the 
 head, stretches out the neck, clenches 
 the fists, breathing hard, breast heaving, 
 teeth shown and gnashing, face bloated, 
 red, pale or black ; eyes red, staring, 
 rolling and sparkling ; eye-brows drawn 
 down over them, stamps with the foot 
 and gives a violent agitation to the 
 whole body. The voice assumes the 
 highest pitch it can adopt, consistantly 
 with force and loudness; Tho' some- 
 
 REVENGE. 
 
 434. Revenge— is a propensity and 
 endeavor to injure or pain the offen- 
 der, contrary to the laws of justice ; 
 
 ! which is attended with triumph and ex- 
 ' ultation, when the injury is inflicted, or 
 ! accomplished. It exposes itself like 
 ! malice, or spite, but more openly, loudly 
 I and triumphantly ; sets the jaws, grates 
 the teeih ; sends blasting flashes from 
 the eyes ; draws the corners of the mouth 
 towards the ears : clenches both fists, 
 and holds the elbow in a straining man- 
 ner : the tone of voice and expression 
 are similar to those of anger ; but the 
 pitch of voice is not so high, nor loud. 
 
 435. Determined Revenge. If they 
 but speak the truth of her, These hands 
 shall tear her; if they wrong her honor. 
 The proudest of them shall well hear of 
 it. Time hath not so dried this blood of 
 mine, Nor age so eat up my invention. 
 Nor fortune made such havoc of my 
 means Nor my bad life — 'reft me so 
 much of friends, But they shall find 
 awak'd in such a kind, Both strength 
 of limb and policy of mind, Ability in 
 means, and choice of friends, to quit me 
 of them thoroughly. 
 
66 
 
 436, Revenge. If it will feed no- 
 thing else it will feed my revenge. He 
 hath disgraced me, and hinder' d me of 
 half a million ; laugh'd at my losses, 
 mocked at my gains, scorn'd my nation, 
 thwarted my bargains, cool'd my friends, 
 heated mine enemies. And what's his 
 reason ? 1 am a Jew f Hath not a Jew 
 eyes ? ftath not a Jew hands ? organs, 
 dimensions, senses, affections, pasHons ? 
 Is he not fed with the same food; hurt 
 with the same weapons; subject to the 
 same diseases ; heal'd by the same 
 means ; warm'd and cool'd by the same 
 summer and winter," as a Christian is ? 
 If you stab us, do we not bleed ? If you 
 tickle us, do we not laugh ? If you poison 
 us, do we not die ? , And if you wrong 
 us, shall we not rtvenge ; If we are like 
 you in the rest, we will resemble you in 
 that. If a Jew wrong a Christian, what 
 is his humility ? Revenge. If a Chris- 
 tian wrong a Jew, what should his suf- 
 ferance be by christian example. Why, 
 Revenge. The villiany you teach me / 
 will execute ; and it shall go hard, but I 
 will better the instruction. 
 
 ANGER, HATRED, REPROACH. 
 
 437. Reproach — is settled anger, or 
 hatred, chastising the object of its dislike, 
 by casting in his teeth the secret causes 
 of his misconduct, or imperfections : the 
 brow is contracted, the lip turn'd up 
 with scorn, the head shaken, the voice 
 low, as if abhorring, and the whole body 
 expressive of aversion: 
 
 438. Reproaching with want of cour- 
 age and spirit. Thou slave, thou wretch, 
 thou coward ! Thou little valiant, great 
 in villainy, Thou ever strong upon the 
 stronger side ! Thou Fortune's champion, 
 thou dost never fight — but when her hu- 
 
 morous ladyship is by — to teach thee, 
 safety ! thou art perjured too, and*sooth~ 
 est up greatness. What a fool art 
 thou, A ramping fool ; to brag and stamp, 
 and swear, Upon my party! Thou cold- 
 blooded slave, Hast thou not spoke like* 
 thunder on my side, Been sworn my 
 soldier? Bidding me depend upon thy 
 stars, thy fortune, and thy strength ? 
 And dost thou now fall over to my foes T 
 Thou wear a lion's hide: doff 'it, for 
 shame, And hang a calfs skin on those 
 recreant limbs. 
 
 TERROR OR FRIGHT, 
 439. When violent and sudden, it 
 opens very wide the mouth, shortens the 
 nose, draws down the eye-brows, gives 
 the countenance an air of wildness, cov- 
 ers it with deadly paleness, draws back 
 the elbows parallel with the sides, lifts 
 up the open hands — with the fingers 
 spread to the height of the breast, at 
 some distance before it, so as to shield it 
 from the dreadful object. One foot is 
 drawn back behind the other, so that the 
 body seems shrinking from the danger, 
 and putting itself in a posture for flight. 
 The heart beats violently, the breath is 
 quick and short, and the whole body is 
 thrown into a general tremor. The voice 
 is weak and trembling, the sentences 
 short and the meaning confused and in- 
 coherent. Imminent danger produces vi- 
 olent shrieks, without any articulate 
 sounds; sometimes confuses the thoughts, 
 produces faintness, which is sometimes 
 followed by death. 
 
 440. Ah ! mercy on my soul ! W^hat 
 is that? My old friend's ghost? They say 
 none but wioked f®\ks walk, I wish I were 
 at the bottom of a coal-pit. See I how 
 long and pale his face has grown since 
 
 
67 
 
 liis death: he never was/? andsome ; and 
 -death has improved him very much the 
 wrong: way. Pray do not come near me ! 
 I wish'd you very well when you were 
 nlivt ; but I could ntver abide a dead 
 man, cheek by jowl with me. Ah, ah, 
 mercy on us ! No, nearer pray, If it be 
 only to take leave of me that you are 
 come back ; I could have excused you 
 the ceremony with all my heart, or if 
 } r ou — mercy on us ! no nearer pray, or, if 
 you have wronged any body, as you al- 
 ways loved money a little, I give you the 
 word of a frightened Christian; I will 
 pray as long as you please, for the de- 
 liverance, or repose of your departed 
 soul. My good, worth?/, noble friend, do, 
 pray disappear, as ever you would wish 
 your old friend to come to his senses 
 again. 
 
 GRIEF AND REMORSE 
 
 441. Are closely allied to sorrow 
 and Remorse ; or a painful remem- 
 brance of criminal actions and pursuits; 
 casts down the countenance, clouds it 
 with anxiety; hangs down the head, 
 shakes it with regret, just raises the 
 -eyes as if to lookup, and suddenly casts 
 them dow T n again with sighs ; the right 
 hand sometimes beats the heart or head, 
 and the whole body writhes as if in self- 
 aversion. The voice has a harshness 
 as in hatred, and inclines to a low and 
 reproachful tone : weeps, stamps, hur- 
 ries to and fro, runs distracted, or faints 
 away. When it is violent, grovels on 
 the ground; tears the clothes, hair or 
 flesh ; screams I sometimes it produces 
 torpid sullen silence, resembling total 
 apathy. 
 
 442. Remorse for Drunkenness. 
 
 1 1 remember a mass of things, but nothing 
 distinctly; a quarrel, nothing wherefore. 
 that men should put an enemy in 
 their mouths to steal away their brains ; 
 that we should with joy, pleasure, revel, 
 applause, transform ourselves int( 
 beasts : I will ask him for my place a- 
 gain ; he shall tell me— I am a drunk- 
 ard : had I as many mouths as Hydra, 
 suck an answer would stop them all. — 
 To be now— a sensible man, by and by 
 a fool — and presently— a beast! O 
 strange ! every inordinate cup is un- 
 bless'd, and the ingredient is a devil. 
 
 443. Grief, deploring loss of happi- 
 ness. I had been happy, if the general 
 camp, Pioneers and all, had wrong'd my 
 loves so had I nothing known : now, 
 forever, farewell the tranquil mind : 
 farewell content : farewell the plumed 
 troop, and the big war, that make ambi- 
 tion — virtue ! farewell ; farewell the 
 neighing steed, and the shrill trump, 
 the spirit stirring drum, the ear piercing 
 fife, the royal banner, and all quality ; 
 pride, pomp and circumstances of glo- 
 rious war ! Farewell ! Othello's occupa- 
 tion's gone. 
 
 DESPAIR, 
 444. As a condemned criminal, or 
 one who has lost all hope of salvation, 
 bends the eye brows downward, clouds 
 the forehead, rolls the eyes around fret- 
 fully, eyeballs red and inflamed like a 
 rabid dog ; opens the mouth horizon- 
 tally, bites the lips, widens the nostrils, 
 and gnashes the teeth ; The head is 
 pressed down upon the breast ; heart 
 too hard to permit tears to flow • arms 
 are sometimes bent at the elbows; the 
 fists clench'd hard ; The veins and 
 muscles swollen ; the skin livid : the 
 
68 
 
 "whole body strained and violently agi- 
 tated; while groans of inward torture 
 are more frequently uttered than words. 
 If any words are spoken, they are few, 
 and expressed with a sullen eager bit- 
 terness 5 the tones of the voice often 
 loud and furious, and sometimes in the 
 same pitch. for a considerable time. 
 
 445. This state of human nature is 
 too terrible, too frightful to look, or 
 dwell upon, and almost improper for 
 representation : for if death cannot be 
 counterfeited without too much shock- 
 ing our humanity ; despair, which ex- 
 hibits a state ten thousand times more 
 terrible than death, ought to.be viewed 
 with a kind of reverence to the great 
 Author of Nature ; who seems some- 
 times to permit this agony of mind, as 
 a warning to avoid that wickedness, 
 which produces it : it can hardly be 
 over-acted. 
 
 SORROW AND SADNESS. 
 
 448. In Sorrow — when moderate, 
 the countenance is dejected, the eyes 
 are cast down, the arms hang lax, 
 sometimes a little raised, suddenly to 
 jail again ; the hands open, the fingers 
 spread, the voice plaintive, and fre- 
 quently interrupted with sighs. But 
 when immoderate, it distorts the coun- 
 tenance, as if in agonies of pain ; raises 
 the voice to the loudest complainings, 
 and sometimes even to cries and shrieks; 
 wrings the hands, beats the head and 
 breast, tears the hair, and throws itself 
 on the ground; like some other passions 
 in excess, it borders on phrenzy, 
 
 447. Seems madam ! nay it is, I know 
 not seems ; 'tis not alone my inky cloak, 
 good mother; Nor customary suits of sol- 
 
 emn black ; nor windy smpiration of 
 fQrc'd breath ; no, nor the fruitful river 
 in the eye ; nor the dejected 'havior of 
 the visage: together with all forms, 
 modes, shows of griej , that can denote 
 me truly; But I have that within, which 
 passtth show; these but the trappings 
 and suits of woe. 
 
 448. Inward Sorrow. Say that a- 
 gain ; the shadow of my sorrow ! Ha ! 
 let's see : 'Tis very true, my grief lies 
 all within ; And these external manners 
 of lament, Are merely shadows to the 
 unseen grief, That swells, with silence, 
 in my tortured soul; There — lies the 
 substance • And' I thank thee king, For 
 thy great bounty, that not only giv'st 
 Me cause to wail, but teachest me the 
 way, How to lament the cause. I'll beg 
 one boon, And then be gone and troubU 
 you no more. 
 
 ATTENTION, LISTENING, &c. 
 
 449. Attention— to an esteemed 01 
 superior character, has nearly the same 
 aspect as Inquiry, and requires silence: 
 the eyes are often cast upon the ground, 
 sometimes fixed upon the face of the 
 speaker ; but not too pertly, or familliar- 
 ly; when looking at objects at a distance, 
 and listening to sounds, its manifesta- 
 tions are different- Inquiry into some 
 difficult subject fixes the body in nearly 
 one position, the head somewhat stoop- 
 ing, the eyes poring, and the eye-brows 
 contracted. 
 
 450. Inquiry — mixed with suspicion -. 
 Pray you, once more — Is not your fath- 
 er grown incapable of reas'nable af- 
 fairs ? is he not stupid With age, and 
 altering rheums? Can he speak, hear, 
 Know man from man, dispute his owja 
 
69 
 
 estate? Lies he not bed-rid, and again ) be lost forever; As if two suns shonld mea* 
 does nothing, But what he did being i in one meridian, And strive, in fieiy 
 diildish. combat, for the passage. 2. Who does 
 
 one thing, and another tell, My heart 
 defesfs him as the gates of hell, 3. Hence y 
 from my sight, Thy father cannot burr 
 thee ; Fly with thy infamy to some dark: 
 cell, Where, on the confines of eternal 
 night, Mourning, misfortunes, cares ana 
 anguish dwell. 
 
 SURPRISE, WONDER, AMAZE- 
 MENT. 
 
 451. An uncommon object produces 
 wonder ; if it appears suddenly, it be- 
 gets surprise, which continued, produ- 
 ces amazement, and if the object of won- 
 der comes gently to the mind and a- 
 verts the attention by its beauty and 
 grandeur, it excites admiration, which is 
 a mixture of approbation and wonder; so 
 true is the observation of the Poet ; 
 Late time shall wonder, that my joys 
 shall raise ; For wonder is involuntary 
 praise. 
 
 452. Wonder or Amazement — opens 
 the eyes and makes them appear very 
 prominent : sometimes it raises them to 
 the skies ; but more frequently fixes 
 them upon the object, if it be present, 
 with a, fearful look : the mouth is open 
 and the hands held up nearly in the at- 
 titude of fear ; and if they hold any 
 thing, they drop it immediately, and 
 unconsciously ; the voice is at first low, 
 but so emphatical that every word is 
 pronounced slowly and with energy, 
 though the first access of this passion 
 often stops all utterance ; when, by the 
 discovery of something excellent in the 
 abject of wonder, the emotion may be 
 called admiration, the eyes are raised, 
 the hands are lifted up, and clapp'd to- 
 gether, and the voice elevated w r ith ex- 
 pressions of rapture. 
 
 453. Hatred of a rival in glory. Exs. 
 1. He is my bane, I cannot bear him ; 
 Qne heav'n and earth can never hold us 
 hflth : Still shall we hate, and with de- 
 nance deadly, Keep rage alive, till one 
 
 VENERATION, DEVOTION. 
 
 454. Veneration — to parents, teach- 
 ers, superiors or persons of eminent 
 virtue and attainments, ;is an humble 
 and respectful acknowledgement of 
 their excellence, and our own inferiori- 
 ty : the head and body are inclined a 
 little forward, and the hand, with the 
 palm downwards, just raised tc^meet 
 the inclination of the body, and then let 
 fall again with apparent timidity and 
 diffidence : the eye is sometimes lifted 
 up, and then immediately cast down- 
 ward, as if unworthy to behold the ob- 
 ject before it ; the eye brows drawn 
 down in the most respectful manner ; 
 the features, and the whole body and 
 limbs, all composed to the most pro- 
 found gravity ; one portion continuing 
 without much change. 
 
 455. When Veneration rises to ad- 
 oration of the Almighty Creator and 
 Redeemer, it is too sacred to be imita- 
 ted, and seems to demand that humbte 
 annihilation of ourselves, which must 
 ever be the consequence of a just sense 
 of the Divine Majesty, and our own un~ 
 worthiness. This feeling is always ac- 
 companied with more or less of awe, 
 according to the object, place fcc — 
 Respect — is but a less degree of venera- 
 tion, and is nearly allied to modesty. 
 
70 
 
 SCORN, CONTEMPT. 
 
 456. Sneer — is ironical approbation; 
 with a voice and countenance of mirth 
 somewhat exaggerated, we cast the se- 
 verest censure ; it is hypocritical mirth 
 and good humor, and differs from the 
 real l>y the sly, arch, satyrical tones of 
 voice, look and gesture, that accompa- 
 ny it; the nose is sometimes turned 
 up, to manifest our contempt, disdain. 
 
 457. Scoffing, at supposed Cowardice. 
 Satan beheld their flight, And to his 
 mates — thus in derision calPd : 
 friends ! why come not on those victors 
 proud? Ere while they fierce were com- 
 ing, and when we, To entertain them 
 fair, with open front, And breast, (what 
 rxmld we more ?) propounded terms of 
 composition; straight, they changed 
 their minds, Flew off, and into strange 
 vagames fell, As they would dance ; yet, 
 for a dance, — they raised Somewhat 
 extravagant and wild, perhaps for Joy 
 of offer'd peace • but I suppose, If our 
 proposals once again were heard, we 
 should compel them to a quick result 
 
 excited by expectation of some evil, or 
 apprehension of impending danger; it 
 expresses less apprehension than dread, 
 and this less than terror or fright : it 
 excites us to provide for our security on 
 the approach of evil ; sometimes settles 
 into deep anxiety, or solicitude : it may 
 be either filial in the good, or slavish in 
 the wicked. See the engraving for its 
 external appearance, and also Terror 
 and Fright. 
 
 459. Awe and Fear. Now all is 
 hush'd, — and still, as death ! How rev- 
 erend is this tall pile, Whose ancient 
 pillars rear their marble heads, To bear 
 aloft its arc'd and pondrous roof, By its 
 own weight made steadfast and im- 
 moveable, Looking tranquility! it 
 strikes an awe, And terror on my 
 aching sight. The tombs, And monu- 
 mental caves of death look cold, and 
 shoot a chillness to my trembling heart. 
 Give me thy hand, and let me hear thy 
 vo i C e_Nay. quickly speak to me, and 
 let me hear' Thy voice,— my own af- 
 frights me with its echoes. 
 
 FEAR, CAUTION. 
 458. Fear— is a powerful emotion, 
 
 SIMPLE LAUGHTER. 
 
 460. Raillery— may signify a ban- 
 tering, a prompting to the use of jesting 
 language; good humored pleasantry, or 
 slight satire; satirical merriment, wit, 
 irony, burlesque. It is very difficult in- 
 deed, to mark the precise boundaries of 
 the different passions, as some of them 
 are so slightly touch'd, and often melt 
 into each other • but because we cannot 
 perfectly delineate every shade of sound 
 and passion, is no reason why we should 
 not attempt approaches to it. 
 
 461. Rallying a person for being 
 melancholy. Let me play the fool with 
 mirth and laughter; so let wrinkles 
 
71 
 
 come, And let my liver rather heat with 
 wine, Than my heart cool with mortify- 
 ing groans. Why should a man, whose 
 blood is warm within, Sit like his grand- 
 sire — cut in alabaster? Sleep, when he 
 wakes, and creep into the jaundice— By 
 being peevish ? I tell thee what, An- 
 thonio. (I love thee, and it is my love 
 that speaks ;) There are a sort of men, 
 whose visages Do cream and mantle — like 
 a standing pond, And do a wilful still- 
 fiess entertain, with purpose to be dress'd 
 in an opinion Of wisdom, gravity, pro- 
 found conceit, As who should say — " 1 
 am Sir Oracle, And when I ope my lips, 
 let no dog bark :" I'll tell thee more of 
 this another time ; But fish not with this 
 melancholy bait, For this fools' gudgeon, 
 this opinion j Come, good Lorenzo, fare 
 ye well awhile, I'll end my exhortation 
 after dinner. 
 
 HORROR. 
 
 462, Horror — is an excessive degree 
 of fear, or a painful emotion, which 
 makes a person tremble : it is generally 
 composed of fear and hate(Lor disgust: 
 the recital of a bloody deed ; $lls one with 
 horror ; there are the horrors of war, and 
 the horrors of famine, horrible places and 
 horrible dreams ; the ascension seems 
 to be as follows, the fearful and dread- 
 ful, (affecting the mind more than the 
 body,) the frightful, the tremendous, ter- 
 rible and horrible : the fearful wave ; 
 the dreadful day ; frightful convulsions ; 
 tremendous storms ; terrific glare of the 
 eyes ; a horrid murder. 
 
 463. Horror. Hark! — the death- 
 denouncing trumpet— sounds The fatal 
 charge, and shouts proclaim the onset. 
 Destruction — rushes dreadful to the field, 
 And bcUhes itself in blood. Havoc let 
 
 loose, Now undistinguished— rages all 
 around; While ruin, seated on her 
 dreary throne, Sees the plain strow'd 
 with subjects, truly hers, Breathless 
 and cold. 
 
 WEEPING. 
 464. Weeping — is the expression, 
 or manifestation, of sorrow, grief, an- 
 guish or joy by out-cry, or by shedding, 
 tears ; a lamentation, bewailing, be- 
 moaning: we may weep each other's 
 woe, or weep tears of joy ; so may tbe 
 rich graves weep odorous gum and 
 balm ; there is weeping amber, and 
 weeping grounds : crying — is an audi- 
 ble expression accompanied, or not, with 
 tears ; but weeping always indicates the 
 shedding of tears- and, when called 
 forth by the sorrows of others, especial- 
 ly, it is an infirmity of which no man 
 would be destitute. 
 
 SIMPLE BODILY PAIN. 
 
 465. Pain— maybe either bodily, or 
 
 mental ; simple, or acute. Bodily Pain, 
 
 is an uneasy sensation in the body, of 
 
 any degree from that which is slight, tu 
 
72 
 
 extreme torture ; it may proceed from 
 pressure, tension, separation of parts by 
 violence, or derangement of the func- 
 tions: mental pain — is uneasiness of 
 mind : disquietude ; anxiety ; solicitude 
 for the future ; grief or sorrow for the 
 past: thus we suffer pain, when we 
 fear, or expect evil ; and we feel pain 
 at the loss of friends, or property. Pain 
 mid the like • affections, indicate a pres- 
 sure or straining. 
 
 ACUTE PAIN, 
 466. Bodily, or Mental, signifies a 
 bigh degree of pain, which may appro- 
 priately be called agony, or anguish ; 
 the agony is a severe and permanent 
 pain; the anguish an overwhelming 
 pain : a pang— is a sharp pain, and gen- 
 erally of short continuance : the pangs 
 of conscience frequently trouble the per- 
 son who is not hardened in guilt ; and 
 the pangs of disappointed love are 
 ximong the severest to be borne : "What 
 pangs the tender breast of Dido tear!" 
 
 as veneration, love, esteem, takes away 
 the familiar gesture and expression of 
 simple love : it is a compound passion 
 excited by something novel, rare, great, 
 or excellent, either of persons or their 
 works : thus, we view the solar system 
 with admiration. It keeps the respect- 
 ful look and attitude : the eyes are wide 
 open, and now and then raised towards 
 heaven ; the mouth is open ; the hands 
 lifted up ; the tone of voice rapturous ; 
 speaks copiously and in hyperboles. 
 
 468. Admiration — is looking at any 
 thing attentively with appreciation ; the 
 admirer suspends his thoughts, not from 
 the vacancy, but from the fulness of his 
 mind : he is riveted to an object, which 
 temporarily absorbs his faculties : no- 
 thing but what is good and great excites 
 admiration ; and none but cultivated 
 minds are very suscepti ble of it ; an ig- 
 norant person cannot admire : because 
 he does not appreciate the value of the 
 thing : the form and use must be seen 
 at any rate. 
 
 ADMIRATION. 
 467. A mixed passion consisting of 
 xspnder, mingled with pleasing emotions; 
 
 ADMIRATION & ASTONISHMENT: 
 
 469. Implies confusion, arising from 
 surprise, &c. at an extraordinary, or 
 unexpected event : astonishment signi- 
 fies to strike with the overpowering 
 voice of thunder ; we are surprised if 
 that does, or does not happen, which we 
 did or did not expect ; astonishment 
 may be awakened by similar event3, 
 which are more unexpected and more 
 unaccountable : thus, we are astonish- 
 ed to find a friend at our house, when 
 we supposed he was hundreds of miles 
 distant; or to hear that a person has 
 t traveled a road, or crossed a stream, 
 that we thought impassable. 
 
73 
 
 470. Vocal Music— is music of the voice, incontra-distinction to Instrumen- 
 tal Music. Sounds are heard through the ear, and may be imitated by the voice. 
 There are three parts : 1. RYTHM, or length of sounds and divisions of time ; 
 i. e. long or short : 2. MELODY, ox pitch and succession of sounds } L e. mere 
 or low : 3. DYNAMICS, or strength and jorce of sounds ; i. e. loud or soft. 
 The elements of music are three ; the length, pitch and quality of sounds. Th« 
 seven pitches of sound constitute the musical alphabet, on which are placed our 
 first seven letters 5 the eighth is a repetition of the first : as follows, in four 
 octaves. 
 
 >AP 
 
 i» 
 
 -0- ( 
 
 2-rC^- 
 
 S 
 
 ODEFGARCDEFGABODEFaABCDEFrrA.Br 
 
 12 »3 45678 2 34567823456782345678 
 
 471. There are seven kinds of notes, and as many rests ; which, with other 
 musical characters, may be seen below under appropriate numbers: 1. whole 
 note (and its rest) each of which is four seconds long : 2. half note, (and it» 
 rest,) two seconds long : 3. quarter note, (and its rest,) one second long : 
 4. eighth note, (and its rest,) half a second : 5. sixteenth note, (and its rest.) 
 quarter of a second : 6. thirty-second note, (and its rest,) one eighth of a 
 second : 7. sixty-fourth note, (and its rest,) one sixteenth of a second : 
 8. the hold ; which generally prolongs the note over which it is placed half its 
 length : 9. repeat ; to be. sung twice : 10. figure 3 over or under three slured 
 notes, to be sting in the time of two : 11. staccato, showing notes under it must 
 be sung distinctly and abruptly : 12. sharp, raising the note after it half a tone : 
 13. flat, depressing a note half atone: 14. single bars, showing the end of 
 measures : lo. double bars, and close, showing the end of strains and times. 
 
 t| If I tj l±a 11*1 iH Mi rfi| 
 
 8 9 10 11 12 1314 15 
 
 -'if 
 
 472. The first character in the following example is the g clef, which show? 
 the situation of the letter G> (which is on the second line) in all the parts except 
 the base, whose clef is railed the F clef, which is placed on the jourthlir** 
 The letters D L and U indicate the movements of the hand down, left, and wjp. 
 
 ^I^^F^^F^feJgfegi^ 
 
 DUDUDUDUDUDU I) U DU DU DU DUDU 1) I 
 
 473. TIME. The figures 2-2 4-2 3-2 &c. show the number of notes and 
 Hoimu a measure, and the ki>d of note® that fill a meeuuro : i. e~ vhe KFffM 
 
74 
 
 figures show the number, and the to web. the kind: the upper is the bumheatos 
 and the lower the denominator. 
 
 S Fg^^-j^^ |J£J^fe^|gjggt] 
 
 DUDU D U DUDU DUDU D U DUDU 
 
 ~1 H i l~ i i i H rr4~i t 
 
 fSS^gS 1 
 
 ? 
 
 DUDU DUlU DUDU 
 
 DUDU DUDU DUDU 
 
 ^ — f— -H-Fr-'r+i— c r-r^f-r-b/fr--.rET-FPr- 
 
 ^:^::si 
 
 Fft 
 
 ip 
 
 DLU DLUDLU DLU 
 
 DLUDLU DLU DLU DLU 
 
 i 
 
 2E 
 
 U> 
 
 P 
 
 _L_ 
 
 pa r<» d " *»~g" 
 
 r rtr<nrsm \ r w 
 
 fiwrfjeL. -f=-j^p= ~f^f : - =g§ :: P : ! 
 
 sczizr 
 
 DLU DLU DLU D L U 
 
 D LU DLU DLU DLU DLU 
 
 ^agfegfe^^^te^^g^^ 
 
 DLUDLU DLU D L U 
 
 LU DLU DLU DLUDLU 
 
 DUDU DU DUDU DUDU 
 
 474. The Natural Diatonic Scale on the Musical Staff of 5 lines and 4 spaces. 
 
 SSgJ 
 
 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 
 
 i^Nis- 
 
 l 3 
 
 49- 
 1 
 
 5=^ 
 
 §SE 
 
 1. Round for three voices in the key of C. 
 
 -r 
 
 ps 
 
 gi" 
 
 White sand and grey sand, White sand and grey sand, Who'll buy my white sandl 
 
 In singing Rounds, the different parts commence successively : this mode of 
 practice is well calculated to make independent singers. 
 
 2. Round for four voices in the key of C. 
 
 w*-- 
 
 m: 
 
 m 
 
 :g=pt 
 
 „<=£ZSL- 
 
 -<£—g>- 
 
 _ I g ^ 9 & 
 
 Law. 
 
 • -4 
 
 .rence! 
 
 Law rence ! Take your grist and go right 
 
 35 
 
 m 
 
 ::£=£ 
 
 ^E$I 
 
 -H^ZSZ 
 
 straight to mill, And see, cay boy., that not 
 
 bit you £[>i]L 
 
75 
 
 3. Round for four voices in the key of A Minor. 
 
 =£ > 5»_ IPCC^— — 
 
 g£ 
 
 =#?-- 
 
 §3« 
 
 ~Si — ^ 
 The bell that's ia the ste - pie high, Is ring - ing mer-ri-ly. 
 
 4. Round for four voices in the key of G. 
 
 ife 
 
 q i T s: 
 
 & 
 
 =s=i= 
 
 *Efc 
 
 Be - fore you make a pro - inise, Con 
 
 -^S 1 ^ 
 
 Iti^s^gs 
 
 si - der. well its im- 
 
 9 
 
 -£tl= 
 
 & — tr 
 
 por - tance; And, when made, en - grave it up- on your heart. 
 
 5. Round for three voices in the key of G. 
 
 ■rj-ftr#'+ | 
 
 
 * ' 
 
 r 
 
 T T . 
 
 IV ! 
 
 p 
 
 Jr\ '~x~ r 
 
 r * " " \ & + r ; 
 
 " • o i 
 
 - L I— >- 
 
 mm /i ' > 
 
 . r ■ ; i i r i ■ ; ' i 
 
 i r ® 
 
 - cd + 
 
 ' i a • r '.■■■»: 
 
 \ ' J ~Jj: I 
 
 ! J I r*--.fi J 1 
 
 i i 
 
 ^ 1 i -. 
 
 The bell doth to 11 3 Its e : choesroll,I know the sound full well. I hear it ring. 
 
 n it '- 
 
 It 
 
 y # i i* i , 
 
 s 
 
 
 
 
 
 J 
 
 / \ \ - & m \ a I II 
 
 ■ 1 |_ !* 
 
 i J 
 
 1 i** 
 
 i 
 
 t 
 
 \\ 
 
 Hi. d * P 1 *> ,4 1 
 
 7^ T i 
 
 rH ' 
 
 " ~Pi ' " 
 
 H ! 
 
 <^i 
 
 i * 
 
 
 c. i 
 
 CT. 
 
 
 
 
 * 
 
 callstosing, Withitsbim,bim,bim, borne, bell, Borne, borne, bim, borne, belL 
 ifc 
 
 6, Round for four voices in the key of D. 
 
 1> 
 
 ^ * * » & & 9 ' ^ & — s^\ • 
 
 Morn-ing is break-ing,Song-sters are wa-king ; All things are cheer-ly , When 'tis so ear-ly . 
 7. Round for four voices in the key of A. 
 
 **£ 
 
 j± qanw t ±mmmb 
 
 When a wea-ry task you find it, Per-se- vere andne-ver mind it, Ne-ver mind it,Ne-ver mind tt 
 8, Round for four voices in the key of E. 
 
 -ZZZaZI—m m M 
 
 
 
 Y 
 
 x 
 
 ,-rf-L. 
 
 P§g 
 
 XT 
 
 -&- 
 
 «+-*- 
 
 Spi-rUs bright! Make our la - bors light. Teach us ail the 
 
 Pii^^gf. 
 
 -£ — r 
 
 tf~ 
 
 pleas-ing art, To 
 
 ^ — w — * — ST 
 do our work with cheer - ful heart. 
 
 9. Round for four voices in the key of F. 
 
 'mm^ mm^mi^m tm 
 
 Sing it o - ver with your might, Never leave If, Never leave it,Till 'tis ri£b4- 
 
SO- 
 
 io. Round for four voices in the key of B fiat. 
 
 m 
 
 SEE 
 
 z=fi>: 
 
 irgr. 
 
 & 
 
 -»— <p — r 
 
 =£=£: 
 
 x 
 
 Scot-land's burning, Scot-land's burning, Look out, 
 
 Look out, 
 
 -i» — p-- 
 
 S 
 
 i 
 
 •f 
 
 -=m-4^=g: 
 
 $= 
 
 ^~r— R 
 
 Fire! Fire! Fire! Fire! Pour on wa - ter, Pour on \va • ter. 
 
 II. Round for three voices in the key of E flat. 
 
 ±fr 
 
 *=} 
 
 P= 
 
 -£=$zt: 
 
 3; 
 
 2-"^=^ 
 
 sfl 
 
 ±3Q: 
 
 S 
 
 2= 
 
 To spend the day well, think-ing nought of the mor-row, To help apoorneigfc- 
 
 fc 
 
 1%T 
 
 ~f- 
 
 *-T-&- 
 
 3=505: 
 
 ~r — rH"j — j 
 - # — e — 
 
 q^Ex 
 
 ¥= 
 
 PHi' 
 
 bor in want or in sor-row, Gives peace, givesrest, makes happy, makesliles!. 
 12. Round for four voices in the key of A flat. 
 
 -^-jrfxrjjfi 
 
 EE 
 
 b 
 
 w± 
 
 -S2~ 
 
 X . ;\ JL 
 
 ?3F 
 
 Lova of truth, Guide my youth, From my heart, Ne'er de - part. 
 
 13. Round for four voices in the key of C. 
 
 (The figures indicating the pitch of sounds.) 
 
 5 6 I 5 6 I 5 4 I 3 || 3 4 | 3 4|32| 1 ' fl 
 
 Wei - come tru - ly is the sound, Mer - ry mer - ry is the round, 
 
 5 8 I 8 8 I 5 7 I 8 || 1 1 | 5 4 | 5 5 | 1 g 
 Sing - ing loud - ly sing-ing hail, Sing cor - rect - ly all the scale. 
 
 14. Round for four voices in the key of C. 
 
 (The figures showing the pitches as above.) 
 
 5 5 I 8 || 2 2 I 3 || 5 3 I 8 || 5 5 | 3 [j 
 It is cold, It is cold, Cold weath - er, Cold weath • er. 
 
 15. Round for three voices in 6-8 time, key of G. 
 
 (7 indicates the 8th note rest.) 
 
 1 2 3 2 3 4 I 3 2 1 (7) || 3 4 5 4 5 6 | 
 Cheer - i - ly, cheer - i - ly sound the strain ; Hap - pi - ly, hap - pi • ly 
 
 5 4 3 (7)j| 1 
 met. a -gain j All, 
 
 (7) 4 (7) 
 
 allj 
 
 5 5 1 (7)| 
 all are here. 
 
s 
 
 
 
 
 » 
 
 3? 
 
 
 ^r — y%ys 
 * 3 3 -^^ 
 
 i>_> 
 
 3 >r- 
 
 
 J>35> 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ^3£S 
 
>.^> y y 
 
 
 :> 
 
 
 > o:>,- > ")i> »:» '>t^x> ir~ 
 
 •>^> r:0 35T» >->r>> xr 
 ~ ;>"> _^Jt> .<Jl> .351 
 
 :>> zx> r? 
 
 >Jl >-? ^ tg >-^- ^^ 
 
 -' > > > >5j 
 ' >3 ^^5" 
 
 ?za 
 
 ZEST 
 
 >^: 
 
 3>r 
 
 
 .-»> 
 
 >1> ">v^ 
 
 » 
 
 
LIBRARY OF CONGRESS 
 
 017 663 009 7